TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
.............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................7
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
..............................69
4
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
.........................................159
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
.................................................215
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
..............................................285
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
...............................................301
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
..................................................361
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
.........................................383
10
INDEX
....................................................................393
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine Mopar威 parts, and is interested in
your satisfaction.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
4 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is found on a
stamped plate located on the left front corner of the
instrument panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle
through the windshield. This number also appears on the
Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a
window on your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient
record of your vehicle identification number and optional
equipment.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN plate.
INTRODUCTION 5
1
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety
and may lead to an accident resulting in serious
injury or death.
6 INTRODUCTION
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys ..................9
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ................9
▫ Sentry Key — If Equipped ................9
䡵 Ignition And Steering Lock .................12
▫ Ignition Accessory Delay Feature ...........13
䡵 Illuminated Entry ........................13
▫ Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks ....13
䡵 Door Locks ............................13
▫ Manual Door Locks .....................13
▫ Power Door Locks .....................14
▫ Child Protection Door Lock ...............17
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry .....................19
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate ..........19
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate ............20
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ..................21
▫ General Information ....................22
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters ........22
▫ Battery Replacement ....................24
2
䡵 Security Alarm System — If Equipped .........24
▫ To Set The Alarm ......................25
▫ To Disarm The System ...................25
䡵 Liftgate ...............................26
䡵 Windows .............................27
▫ Power Windows .......................27
▫ Auto Down ..........................28
▫ Window Lockout Switch .................28
䡵 Occupant Restraints ......................28
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts .....................29
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ....34
▫ Second Row Center Seat Belt ..............34
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners ...................35
▫ Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert) ...........................36
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women ............37
▫ Seat Belt Extender ......................37
▫ Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS)—Airbags ...........38
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...............52
▫ Child Restraint ........................54
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations ...........64
䡵 Safety Tips ............................65
▫ Exhaust System .......................65
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ..............................66
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The
Vehicle ..............................66
8 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The double sided keys may be inserted into the locks
with either side up. The keys for your new vehicle are
enclosed in a plastic bag with a bar code label affixed to
the front. The bar code can be used to order duplicate
keys from your dealer or a locksmith. If you received
your keys without the bag, ask your dealer to give you
the number.
NOTE: Integrated keys (key and key fob combined)
must be cut by the dealer. The dealer must have cutters
that have enough clearance for integrated keys.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
If you open the driver’s door when the key is in the
ignition lock, a continuous chime will sound to remind
you to remove the key.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock
all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
SENTRY KEY — IF EQUIPPED
With this system, an electronically coded ignition key
sends a signal to the vehicle electronics. If the electronics
recognizes the signal, the vehicle will start and continue
to run. If the system does not recognize the signal, the
vehicle will start and run for 2 seconds, then shut off.
After six unsuccessful attempts at starting, the system
will shut down until the correct key is used.
NOTE: If the key is in the ignition switch, then all
buttons on that transmitter will be disabled. The buttons
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 9
2
on the remaining transmitters will work. If the vehicle is
moving 5 mph or more, then all the transmitter buttons
are disabled for all keys.
NOTE: The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not
compatible with remote starting systems. Use of these
systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a
loss of security protection. Additional Sentry Keys or
Mobil Speed-pass™ devices held against or immediately
adjacent to the ignition key when starting the engine may
cause vehicle starting problems. If a problem occurs,
remove the Sentry Key from the key-ring and attempt to
start the vehicle again. Pagers, cell phones, walkman, etc.
will have no effect on this system.
The ⬙Security Light⬙ will illuminate for about 3 seconds
when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON
position. If the vehicle electronics do not receive a valid
signal from the ignition key, the ⬙Security Light⬙ will flash
continuously to signal that the vehicle has been immobi-
lized. If the ⬙Security Light⬙ remains on during vehicle
operation, it indicates a fault in the system electronics. If
this option was ordered, all of the keys provided with
your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four digit PIN number. This number is required
for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may
be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the
Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key is one which has never been
programmed and needs to be cut.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys to the dealer.
Customer Key Programming
You can program new keys to the system if you have two
valid keys by doing the following:
1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition and turn the
ignition to the ON position for at least 3 seconds but no
longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition back to the OFF
position and remove the first key.
2. Insert the second valid key and switch the ignition to
the ON position within 15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a
chime will sound and the ⬙Security Light⬙ will begin to
flash. Turn the ignition back to the OFF position and
remove the second key.
3. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition and switch
the ignition to the ON position within 60 seconds of
having removed the second key. After 10 seconds, a
single chime will sound. The ⬙Security Light⬙ will stop
flashing, then turn on for 3 seconds; then turn off.
The new Sentry Key has been programmed. Repeat this
process to program up to a total of 8 keys.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
2
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
IGNITION AND STEERING LOCK
In the LOCK position, the steering and ignition systems
are locked to provide anti-theft protection for your ve-
hicle. It may be difficult to turn the key from the LOCK
position when starting your vehicle, if the steering wheel
is locked. Move the steering wheel left and right while
turning the key until it turns easily. The key can be
inserted or withdrawn only in the LOCK position. Push
in on the key in the ignition lock cylinder to rotate to the
LOCK position.
WARNING!
The key cannot be turned to LOCK until the selector
is in the PARK position. Do not attempt to pull the
shift lever out of PARK after the key is in the LOCK
position.
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The steering wheel will lock when the key is
removed, and the steering wheel is turned around 115
degrees clockwise or 65 degrees counterclockwise from
the center position.
Ignition Accessory Delay Feature
When the ignition is turned to OFF/LOCK position the
accessory features on the vehicle will continue to operate
for ten minutes or until the driver’s door is opened. The
accessory features are: Power Windows, Sunroof, and
Radio. This feature can be turned off by the dealer.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks
All interior lights will illuminate in the vehicle when the
doors are unlocked using the key fob.
The interior lights will remain on for 30 seconds after the
last door is closed, or until all doors are closed and either
the ignition is turned to the ON position or a key fob
LOCK button is pressed.
There is also a battery saver feature that will turn the
interior lights off after 8 minutes if the ignition is OFF
and a door is left open or the dimmer control is in the
interior lights ON position.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
All the doors can be “manually” locked from the inside
by pushing down the door lock plunger, located at the
rear of the door. Both front doors may be opened from the
inside with the door lock plunger in the down or locked
position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
2
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause severe personal inju-
ries and death.
Power Door Locks
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicles equipped with power door locks can be locked
or unlocked from inside by either the use of the door lock
switches located on the front doors or by pressing the
LOCK or UNLOCK buttons on the Remote Keyless Entry
key fob.
As a safety feature the doors will not lock when using the
door lock switches during the following conditions:
•
The driver’s door is open while the key is in the
ignition.
Automatic Door Locks
If this feature is enabled, your door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph
(24 km/h).
This feature is enabled when your vehicle is shipped
from the assembly plant and can be disabled by using the
following procedure:
1. Enter your vehicle and Close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this
programming procedure).
3. Place the key into the ignition.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
2
4. Within 10 seconds, cycle the key from the OFF position
to the ON position four times; ending in the ON position
( Do not start the engine ).
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
in the LOCK direction.
6. A single chime will be heard to indicate the feature has
been disabled.
7. To re-activate this feature, repeat the above steps.
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be disabled. If necessary, repeat
the above procedure.
Auto Unlock Feature
This feature unlocks all the doors of the vehicle when any
door is opened (excluding liftgate). The following must
be met:
•
The Automatic Door Lock feature must be enabled.
•
The doors of the vehicle must be locked automatically
by the Automatic Door Lock feature.
•
The vehicle is in P (Park) and the ignition switch is in
any key position.
This feature will not operate if any of the conditions
above are not met or following has occurred:
•
Any manual operation of a door lock switch has
occurred.
NOTE: This customer programmable feature is enabled
when your vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant.
Auto Unlock Feature Programming
Customer Programming sequence to disable or enable:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt (fastening the seat belt will cancel
any chiming that may be confusing during this program-
ming procedure).
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Insert the key into the ignition.
4. Within 10 seconds, cycle the key from the OFF position
to the ON position four times ending in the ON position
(do not start the engine).
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
in the UNLOCK direction.
6. A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has
been changed.
7. To reactivate the feature, repeat the above steps.
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be changed. If necessary repeat
the above procedure.
Child Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have the child-
protection door lock system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
2
To use the system, open each rear door and slide the
control UP to engage the locks and DOWN to disengage
the child-protection locks. When the system on a door is
engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE: After setting the child protection door lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate or activate the panic alarm from distances a
minimum of 66 feet (20 meters) using a hand held radio
transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
To unlock the doors and liftgate:
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob
once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice to unlock
all the doors and liftgate. When the UNLOCK button is
pressed, the illuminated entry will initiate, and the
parking lights will flash on twice.
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors
upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
key fob.
2. Continue to hold the LOCK button at least 4 seconds,
but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold the
UNLOCK button. A single chime will sound to indicate
that this feature has changed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
2
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the keyfob.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob while
you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
To lock the doors and liftgate:
Press and release the LOCK button on the key fob to lock
all doors and liftgate. If the ignition is OFF, when the
doors are locked, the parking lights will flash on once
and the horn will chirp once.
Horn Chirp Programming
The horn chirp feature will be shipped from the assembly
plants activated. If desired this feature can be disabled by
using the following procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on the key fob.
2. After holding the LOCK button for four seconds, also
press the PANIC button within 6 seconds. Asingle chime
will sound to indicate that this feature has changed.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
5. Test the horn chirp feature while outside of the ve-
hicle, by pressing the LOCK button on the key fob with
the ignition in the OFF position and the key removed.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob, while
you are inside the vehicle, will activate the Security
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
6. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
Flash Lamps with Lock Programming
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key fob.
2. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds,
also press the LOCK button within 6 seconds. A single
chime will sound to indicate that this feature has
changed.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the flash lamps with LOCK feature while outside
of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK button on the key
fob with the ignition in the OFF position, and the key
removed.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the key fob, while
you are in the vehicle, will activate the Security Alarm.
Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will
cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to
deactivate the Security Alarm.
5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
Using the Panic Alarm
To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is OFF press
and release the PANIC button on the transmitter once.
When the Panic mode is activated, the interior lights will
illuminate, the headlamps and parking lights will flash,
and the horn will sound.
To cancel the Panic mode press and release the PANIC
button on the transmitter a second time. Panic mode will
automatically cancel after 3 minutes or if the vehicle is
started or exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). During the Panic
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
2
Mode, the door locks and remote keyless entry systems
will function normally. Panic mode will not disarm the
security system on vehicles so equipped.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate from a
normal distance, check for these two conditions.
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of
batteries is five years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
or CB radios.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with
two key fob transmitters programmed only for that
vehicle. A total of eight fobs can be programmed for your
vehicle. Additional fobs can be programmed to your
vehicle through the use of a currently programmed fob.
NOTE: When entering program mode using that fob, all
other programmed fobs will be erased and you will have
to reprogram them for your vehicle.
Use the Following procedure to program additional key
fobs if the vehicle is not equipped with Sentry Key:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seatbelt will cancel
any chiming that may confuse you during this program-
ming procedure).
3. Place the key into the ignition.
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position ( Do not start the
engine ).
5. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key fob.
6. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds,
also press the PANIC button within 6 seconds.
7. When a single chime is heard release both buttons. The
chime is an indication that you have successfully entered
program mode. All fobs that are to be programmed must
be done so within 60 seconds of when the chime was
heard.
8. Using the fob to be programmed, press and release
both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, simultaneously.
9. A single chime will be heard.
10. Within four seconds of hearing the chime, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the fob.
11. A single chime will be heard.
12. Repeat steps 8 through 10 to program up to six
additional fobs.
13. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
14. Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to 60
seconds from when the original chime was heard. After
60 seconds, all programmed fobs function normally.
NOTE: If you do not have a programmed transmitter,
contact your dealer for details.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
1. If the key fob is equipped with a screw, remove the
screw. With the transmitter buttons facing down, use a
flat blade to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart.
Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during
removal.
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. To assemble the transmitter case, snap the two halves
together.
NOTE: If the key fob is equipped with a screw, reinstall
and tighten the screw until snug.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system monitors the vehicle doors, liftgate, and
ignition for unauthorized operation. When the alarm is
activated, the system provides both audible and visual
signals. The horn will sound repeatedly for 3 minutes
and the headlights and security light in the instrument
cluster will flash for an additional 15 minutes. The engine
will not run until the system is disarmed.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Set the Alarm:
The alarm will set when you use the power door locks or
use the Keyless Entry transmitter to lock the doors. After
all the doors are locked and closed the security light in
the instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the
system is arming. The security light in the instrument
panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 15 seconds to
indicate that the alarm is being set. After the alarm is set,
the security light will flash at a slower rate to indicate
that the system is armed.
NOTE: If the security light stays on continuously during
vehicle operation, have the system checked by your
dealer.
To Disarm the System:
Use the Keyless Entry transmitter to unlock the doors. If
something has triggered the system in your absence, the
horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors.
Check the vehicle for tampering.
The security system will also disarm, if the vehicle is
started with a programmed Sentry Key. If an unpro-
grammed Sentry Key is used to start a vehicle, the engine
will start and run for 2 seconds and then shut down.
After six unsuccessul attempts at starting the engine, the
system will shut down until the correct key is used. To
exit alarming mode, press the RKE Unlock button or start
the vehicle with a programmed Sentry Key.
The security alarm system is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in the
vehicle and lock the doors with the transmitter, the alarm
will sound when you pull the door handle to exit.
NOTE: You may accidentally activate the security sys-
tem (horn sounds and lights flash) by entering the vehicle
without using the key fob to unlock the door(s). The
security system can be disarmed with the key fob’s
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
2
UNLOCK button or by inserting a programmed Sentry
Key into the ignition and turning the key to the ON
position.
LIFTGATE
Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed
without using the key. To open the liftgate, pull out on
the outside handle and lift.
WARNING!
•
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison-
ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
•
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do NOT use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The control on the left front door has up-down switches
that give you finger tip control of all four power win-
dows. There is a single opening and closing switch on the
passenger doors for passenger window control. The
windows will operate only when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position and for ten minutes after the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
ignition is turned OFF or the driver’s door is opened.
This feature can be turned off by your authorized dealer.
NOTE: The Power Accessory Delay feature will allow
the power windows to operate for ten minutes after the
ignition it turned OFF.
Auto Down
The driver’s window switch has an Auto Down feature.
Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and
the window will go down automatically. To cancel the
Auto Down movement, operate the switch in either the
up or down direction and release the switch.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window lock button. To enable the window controls,
press the window control button again.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, knee
bolsters, front airbags for both the driver and front
passenger, and if equipped left and right side curtain
airbags for the driver and passengers seated next to a
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
window. If you will be carrying children too small for
adult-size seat belts, your seat belts or the LATCH feature
(refer to the Child Restraint section in this manual), can
be used to hold infant and child restraint systems.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and that
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle have combination
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is de-
signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
2
freely with you under normal conditions. But in a colli-
sion, the belt will lock and reduce the risk of your striking
the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the
best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could
make your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instruc-
tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
your passengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for
more than one person, no matter what their size.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch
plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
2
WARNING!
•
A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect
you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your
body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle
your belt into the buckle nearest you.
•
A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In
a sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing
the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
•
A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle
in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. And a belt
worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs
aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the
force in a collision.
•
A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit
your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used
together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it
to your dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If the front airbags are deployed the front
pretensioning retractors must be replaced.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
2
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front and second row outboard seats, the shoulder
belt can be adjusted upward or downward to help
position the belt away from your neck. Push in on the
anchorage release button to release the anchorage, and
then move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in the desired position. Pull the seatback
forward to ensure that it is locked in the upright position.
WARNING!
A 20% seatback that is not fully latched in the
upright position will not protect you properly.
Second Row Center Seat Belt
The center seating position in the second row has a seat
belt assembly that can be converted from the normal
emergency locking mode to the automatic locking mode.
The seat belt should only be used in the automatic
locking mode when a child seat is installed at this seating
location.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When sitting in this seating location, ensure the seatback
is fully engaged with the seatback latch by pushing
rearward on the center seatback until you hear a click
that signals latch engagement.
Automatic Locking Mode
To convert from the normal emergency locking mode to
the automatic locking mode, grasp the shoulder belt
portion and pull all of the webbing out of the retractor.
Allow some of the webbing to retract into the retractor, as
the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound to indicate
the seat belt is now in the automatic locking mode. Once
the automatic locking mode has been activated, you will
not be able pull the webbing back out of the retractor. To
disengage the automatic locking mode, simply allow the
seat belt to retract fully into the retractor to return the seat
belt to the normal emergency locking mode.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove any slack from the seat belt system in the event of
a collision. These devices improve the performance of the
seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretension-
ers are single use items. After a collision that is severe
enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners, both
must be replaced.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning
System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96
seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated
if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10
seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8
km/h).
Once the warning is triggered it can be paused if the
vehicle speed drops below 5 mph (8 km/h. The warning
will be restarted if the vehicle speed becomes greater
than 5 mph.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be en-
abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
following these steps:
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. DaimlerChrysler does not recom-
mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert).
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
buckle the driver’s seat belt. DO NOT start the engine or
press the trip reset button.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait
for the seat belt Warning Light to turn off. If during this
time, the seat belt becomes unbuckled or the engine is
cranked or started, programming will be cancelled.
3. Unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt
three times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
buckled. A chime will sound immediately (once the
feature has toggled). If during this time the ignition
switch is turned out of the ON position or the timer
expires, programming mode will be cancelled.
4. Programming mode will be cancelled after the feature
has toggled with the seat belt still buckled or if the
ignition switch is turned to the lock position or 10
seconds after the feature has toggled.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reacti-
vated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s seat
belt remains unbuckled.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, your
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender and store it.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use the
seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long
enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the extender when not needed.
Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS)—Airbags
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
steering wheel. The passenger front airbag is mounted in
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS/AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
Also, the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal
regulations that define Occupant Classification (Refer to
⬙Occupant Classification System⬙ in this section).
This vehicle may also be equipped with window bags to
protect the driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next
to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with window
bags, they are located above the side windows. Their
covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
WARNING!
•
Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured be-
cause the airbags are not there to protect you. These
protective covers for the airbag cushions are de-
signed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do
not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to
block the location of the window bag. The area
where the window bag is located should remain
free from any obstructions.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
2
Along with the seat belts, front airbags work with the
instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Window
bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions.
NOTE: The passenger front airbag may not deploy even
when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classi-
fication System (refer to ⬙Occupant Classification System⬙
in this section) has determined the passenger seat is
empty or is occupied by someone that is classified in the
⬙small child⬙ category.
If your vehicle is so equipped, the window bag on the
crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to
severe side collisions. But even in collisions where the
airbags work, you need the seat belts to keep you in the
right position for the airbags to protect you properly.
Here are some simple steps you can follow to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint.
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag.
An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to
infants in that position.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts
properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the airbag room to inflate.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. If your vehicle has window bags, do not lean against
the door or window, airbags will inflate forcefully into
the space between you and the door.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in the ⬙If
You Need Customer Assistance⬙ section later in this
owner’s manual.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have airbags.
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during airbag deployment could cause
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
•
If the vehicle has window bags, they also need
room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or
window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
Air Bag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller
•
Side Remote Acceleration Sensors (If Equipped)
•
Airbag Warning Light
•
Driver Airbag
•
Passenger Airbag
•
Window Bags above Side Windows (If Equipped)
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Interconnecting Wiring
•
Knee Impact Bolsters
•
Front Acceleration Sensors
•
Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
•
Occupant Classification System (OCS) for the Front
Passenger Seat
−
Occupant Classification Module
−
Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
−
Weight Sensors
How the Airbag System Works
•
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are de-
signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation
from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC may
also modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant
size provided by the Occupant Classification Module.
The ORC will not detect roll over.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or RUN positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the steering wheel and
column, and knee bolsters. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition,
the airbags are not on and will not inflate.
During a moderate-to-severe rear impact the ORC may
deploy the seat belt pretensioners alone.
Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning
light and PAD indicator light in the instrument
panel for 6 to 8 seconds for a self-check when
the ignition is first turned on. After the self-
check, the AIRBAG warning light will turn off. The PAD
indicator light will function normally (Refer to ⬙Passen-
ger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light⬙ in this section).
If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the
system, it turns on the AIRBAG warning light either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound
if the light comes on again after initial start up.
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG warning light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not
come on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have the airbag system
checked right away.
•
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of
a Federally regulated safety system required for this
vehicle. It is designed to turn off the front passenger
airbag in the unlikely event that a rear-facing infant
seat is in the front passenger seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
NOTE: Children 12 years and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint.
•
The Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
(an amber light located in the center of the instrument
panel) tells the driver and front passenger when the
front passenger airbag is turned off. The PAD Indica-
tor lamp illuminates the words ⬙PASS AIR BAG OFF⬙
to show that the passenger airbag will not inflate
during a collision requiring airbags. When the right
front passenger seat is empty or when very light
objects are placed on the seat, the passenger air bag
will not inflate even though the Passenger Airbag
Disable (PAD) indicator lamp is not illuminated.
The PAD indictor light should not be illuminated
when teenagers, most children in a forward facing
child restraint or booster seats, most children that can
properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt, and when an
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
adult passenger is properly seated in the front passen-
ger seat. In this case, the air bag is ready to be inflated
if a collision requiring an airbag occurs.
For almost all properly installed rear facing child re-
straints, the PAD indicator light will be illuminated
indicating that the front passenger airbag is turned off
and will not inflate. If the PAD indicator light is not
illuminated, DO NOT assume the air bag is turned off
and move the child restraint to the second row of seats. A
deploying passenger air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child in a rear facing infant seat.
NOTE: Even though this vehicle is equipped with an
occupant classification system, children 12 years and
under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an
appropriate child restraint (see section on child re-
straints).
Front Passenger
Seat Occupant
Passenger Air-
bag Disable
(PAD) Indicator
Light
Airbag Status
Adult OFF ON
Grocery Bags,
Heavy Briefcases
and Other Rela-
tively Light Ob-
jects
ON OFF
Empty or Very
Small Objects
OFF* OFF
* Since the system senses weight, some small objects
will turn the PAD Indicator Light on.
The OCS classifies an occupant using weight sensors
mounted in the base of the front passenger seat. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the system. Objects
hanging on the seat or other passengers pushing down
on the seat will also be sensed. The weight of an adult
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
2
will cause the system to turn the airbag on. In this case,
the OCS has classified the occupant of the seat as an
adult. An adult occupant needs to sit in a normal position
(with their feet on or near the floor) in order to be
properly classified. Reclining the seat back too far may
change how an occupant is classified by the OCS.
Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD
Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding
in the front passenger seat. If an adult occupant’s weight
is transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door
or instrument panel), the weight sensors in the seat may
not properly classify the occupant. Objects lodged under
the seat or between the seat and the center console can
prevent the occupant’s weight from being measured
properly and may result in the occupant being improp-
erly classified. Ensure that the front passenger seat back
does not touch anything placed on the second row of
seats because this can also affect occupant classification.
Also, if you fold down the seats in the second row check
to be sure they don’t touch the front passenger seat.
If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way, it
should only be serviced by an authorized dealer. If the
seat is removed (or even if the seat attachment bolts are
loosened or tightened in any way), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer.
If there is a fault present in the OCS, the Airbag Warning
Light (a red light located in the center of the instrument
cluster directly in front of the driver) will be turned on.
This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. TheAirbag Warning Light is turned on
whenever there is fault that can affect the operation of the
airbag system. If there is a fault present in the OCS, both
the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light
are illuminated to show that the passenger airbag is
turned off until the fault is cleared. If an object is lodged
under the seat and interferes with operation of the weight
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
sensors, a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD
Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light. Once the
lodged object is removed, the fault will be automatically
cleared after a short period of time.
•
The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates
may be possible based on collision severity and occu-
pant size. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper right side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size.
The bags fully inflate in about 50 - 70 milliseconds.
This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes.
The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger. The driver’s front
airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of
the airbag. The passenger’s front airbag gas is vented
through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this
way the airbags do not interfere with your control of
the vehicle.
•
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is lo-
cated beneath the front passenger seat. The OCM
classifies the occupant into categories based on the
measurements made by the seat weight sensors. The
OCM communicates with the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC). The ORC uses the occupant category to
determine whether the front passenger airbag should
be turned off. It also determines the rate of airbag
inflation during a collision.
•
Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between
the seat and the floor pan. The weight sensors measure
applied weight and transfers that information to the
OCM.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
2
•
The Side Impact SRS Window Bags are designed to
activate only in certain side collisions. When the ORC
(with side impact option) detects a collision requiring
the window bags to inflate, it signals the inflators on
the crash side of the vehicle.Aquantity of nontoxic gas
is generated to inflate the window bag. The inflating
window bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner
out of the way and covers the window. The airbag
inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about one quarter of
the time it takes to blink your eyes) with enough force
to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the
window bag inflates. This especially applies to chil-
dren. The window bag is only about 3-1/2 inches (9
cm) thick when it is inflated.
•
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
the driver and the front passenger, and position every-
one for the best interaction with the front airbag.
The front passenger seat assembly contains critical com-
ponents that affect the front passenger airbag deploy-
ment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat compo-
nents are critical for the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calcu-
late the proper airbag deployment. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat components,
assembly, or to the seat cover.
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
•
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
•
Do not modify the front seat center console or center
position seat in any way.
•
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not
designated for the specific model being repaired. Al-
ways use the correct seat cover specified for the
vehicle.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat
cover.
•
Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those
approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
•
At no time should any supplemental restraint system
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fas-
tener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/
Mopar.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the front passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents, or seat cover may inadvertently change the
airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an acci-
dent. A modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS).
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy the airbags
when the impact sensors detect a moderate-to-severe
frontal collision, to help restrain the driver and front
passenger, and then immediately deflate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
2
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately. As the airbags deflate you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-
product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas
used for airbag inflation. These airborne particles may
irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin
or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For
nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the
irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufac-
turer’s instructions for cleaning.
•
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly, replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant
Classification System serviced as well.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you.
Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side
of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body
structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system. The
airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications
are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag
system service. If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to
be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufac-
turer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify an
advanced airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact your autho-
rized dealer.
•
Do not place or hang any items such as add-on video players on the right
front passenger seat back. The additional weight may cause the Occupant
Classification System to be unable to correctly classify the right front
occupant. This could allow the passenger frontal airbag to inflate when it is
not desired.
•
You need proper knee impact protection in a collision. Do not mount or
locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself. Be sure
to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
Enhanced Accident Response System
If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical
system remains functional, vehicles equipped with
power door locks will unlock automatically. In addition,
approximately 5 seconds after the vehicle has stopped
moving, the interior lights will light until the ignition
switch is turned off.
Airbag Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in an impact. While
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
•
The airbag light does not come on or flickers during
the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first
turned on.
•
The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second
interval.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
2
•
The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer or any engine
related gauges are not working, the airbag control mod-
ule may also be disabled. The airbags may not be ready
to inflate for your protection. Promptly check fuse block
for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on the inside of
the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses. See your
dealer if the fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an airbag deployment, your vehicle is
designed to record up to 2-seconds of specific vehicle
data parameters (see list below) in an event data recorder
prior to the moment of airbag deployment. Please note
that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys,
and are otherwise unavailable. In conjunction with other
data gathered during a complete accident investigation,
the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler
Corporation and others to learn more about the possible
causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to
assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition to
crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler Corpo-
ration, such investigations may be requested by custom-
ers, insurance carriers, government officials, and profes-
sional crash researchers, such as those associated with
universities, and with hospital and insurance organiza-
tions.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation (regardless of initiative),
the company or its designated representative will first
obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for
the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the US govern-
ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, ve-
hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corpora-
tion to any third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a
DaimlerChrysler Corporation product
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
4. Otherwise required by law
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
the airbag system
•
Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)
•
⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
•
Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
•
Seatbelt status
•
Brake status (service and parking brakes)
•
Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
•
Engine control status (including engine speed)
•
Cruise control status
•
Traction/stability control status
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
2
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time - babies and children, too. Every state in the United
States and all Canadian provinces require that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. Children 12
years and under should ride properly buckled up in a
rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, chil-
dren are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat
owner’s manual to ensure you have the right seat for
your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child:
Infants and Small Children
•
This vehicle is not capable of accommodating the
installation of a car bed used for carrying newborn
babies at the right front passenger seat position. If a car
bed must be used to transport a newborn baby, the car
bed must be installed in the second seating row only.
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward facing: infant
carriers and ⬙convertible⬙ child seats.
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). ⬙Convertible⬙ child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH child restraint anchorage system. (See the
LATCH - Child Seat Anchorage System section.)
•
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. (See the LATCH - Child Seat
Anchorage System Section.)
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
child’s back is against the seat back, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-
positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt.
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
•
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
A rearward facing infant restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing infant
restraint in the front seat may be struck by a
deploying passenger airbag which may cause se-
vere or fatal to the infant.
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. The manufacturer recommends that you
try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will
use it before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
•
The second row outside seating positions and all third
row seats have cinching latch plates. The second row
center position has an automatic locking retractor.
These are designed to keep the lap portion tight
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to
use a locking clip. If the seat belt has a cinching latch
plate, pulling up on the shoulder portion of the
lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching
latch plate will keep the belt tight, however, any seat
belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt
occasionally and pull it tight if necessary. If the seat
belt has a automatic locking retractor, it will have a
distinctive label. Pull the belt from the retractor until
there is enough to allow you to pass through the child
restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then,
pull the belt until it is all extracted from the retractor.
Allow the belt to return to the retractor, pulling on the
excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the
child restraint. Refer to ⬙Automatic Locking Mode⬙
earlier in this section.
•
Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the
manufacturer’s instructions tell you.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
LATCH - Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
Your vehicle’s second row seat is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure. LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are
now available. However, because the lower anchorages
are to be introduced over a period of years, child restraint
systems having attachments for those anchorages will
continue to also have features for installation using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Child restraints having tether straps
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages
have been available for some time. For some older child
restraints, many child restraint manufacturers offer
add-on tether strap kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to
take advantage of all the available attachments provided
with your child restraint in any vehicle.
All three second row seating positions have lower an-
chorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH-
compatible child seats having flexible, webbing-mounted
lower attachments. Child seats with fixed lower attach-
ments must be installed in the outboard positions only.
Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment,
NEVER install LATCH-compatible child seats such that
two seats share a common lower anchorage. If you are
installing LATCH-compatible child restraints in adjacent
rear seating positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or
the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard position, but you
must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the center position. If
your child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, you can
only install the child restraints using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Please refer to the next section for typical installa-
tion instructions.
Second Row Left Side
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system. The rear
seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at the rear
of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back, and are
just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the
child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your
finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat
cushion surfaces. In addition, there are tether strap
anchorages behind each second row seating position
located on the back of the seat. Many, but not all restraint
systems will be equipped with separate straps on each
side, with each having a hook or connector for attach-
ment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting
the tension in the strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints
and some rear-facing infant restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap, a hook for attachment to the
tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the
tension of the strap. You will first loosen the adjusters on
the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can
more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
Second Row Right Side
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
2
anchorages. Next attach the lower hooks or connectors
over the top of the anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat
cover material. Then attach the tether strap to the anchor-
age located on the back of the seat, being careful to route
the tether strap to provide the most direct path between
the anchor and the child restraint. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the
head restraint and, route the tether strap under the head
restraint and between the two posts. Finally, tighten all
three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and
downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch-
ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
restraint so that it should not be necessary to use a
locking clip. If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate,
pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder
belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will
keep the belt tight, however, any seat belt system will
loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
it tight if necessary. If the seat belt has an automatic
locking retractor, it will have a distinctive label. Pull the
belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you
to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch
plate into the buckle. Then, pull the belt until it is all
extracted from the retractor. Allow the belt to return to
the retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion about the child restraint. For automatic
locking retractor seat belts, refer to ⬙Automatic Locking
Mode⬙ earlier in this section. If you have trouble tighten-
ing the lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because
the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint, follow these steps. If the buckle
is webbing mounted, disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt to shorten it.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release
button facing out. If the belt still can’t be tightened, the
buckle is not webbing mounted, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the latch plate around, and insert the
latch plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make
the child restraint secure, try a different seating position
or use the locking clip provided with your child restraint.
To attach a child restraint tether strap: Route the tether
strap over the seat back, between the head restraint posts
and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the
back of the seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
2
Second Row Seat
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraints in Third Row Seating (If
Equipped)
The third seating row is not capable of installing child
restraints that require the use of a tether strap. There are
no tether anchor provisions for the third seating row in
your vehicle, the hooks in the rear floor are not designed
to withstand the forces that may occur during a crash.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap. Do not install a child restraint that requires a
tether strap in the third seating row (if equipped) of
this vehicle.
Child Restraint Tether Anchor
There are tether strap anchorages behind each seating
position in the second row. For vehicles equipped with
third row seating, there is no Child Tether Anchorage
provided for the third row of seats. To install child
restraint tethers follow these instructions.
1. Place the child restraint in the second row of seats.
2. Route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the tether anchor located on the seat back and remove the
slack in the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
2
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
seat failure and injury to the child. In a collision, the
seat could come loose and allow the child to crash
into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers, or
even be thrown from the vehicle. Use only the
anchor positions directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap. Follow the
instructions below. See your dealer for help if nec-
essary.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your new vehicle. Drive moderately during the first 300
miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds
up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. While
cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the limits
of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Avoid wide open throttle acceleration in low gear.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality, energy-conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown in Section 7.
NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS
MUST NEVER BE USED.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles of operation. This is a normal part of the
break-in and is not an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust System
WARNING!
Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an ex-
tremely toxic gas that by itself is colorless and
odorless. To avoid inhaling these gases, the follow-
ing precautions should be observed:
•
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in
or out of the area.
•
It may be necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for more than a short period. If so,
adjust your climate control system to force outside air
into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed and the
controls in any position except OFF or RECIRC.
•
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
Be aware of changes in the sound of the exhaust system;
exhaust fumes detected inside the vehicle; or damage to
the underside or rear of the vehicle. Have a competent
mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adja-
cent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections
could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace or adjust as required.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
2
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if
they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or retractor
condition, replace the belt.
Defrosters
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You can feel the air
directed against the windshield.
Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The
Vehicle:
Tires
Examine tires for tread wear or uneven wear patterns.
Check for stones, nails, glass or other objects lodged in
the tread.
Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check wheel
nuts for tightness and tires for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights as
you turn them on. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching and locking.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid Leaks
Check the area under vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, water, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected, the cause should be located and
corrected.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors ...............................74
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror .................74
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped ....74
▫ Outside Mirrors .......................75
▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature — If
Equipped ............................75
▫ Electric Remote-Control Mirrors ............76
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped ....77
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .............77
▫ Automatic Dimming Driver’s Exterior
Mirror — If Equipped ...................78
䡵 Hands–Free Communication (UConnect™) — If
Equipped .............................78
▫ Operation ............................80
▫ Phone Call Features ....................86
▫ UConnect™ System Features ..............89
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity .............93
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
UConnect™ System .....................95
3
䡵 Seats ................................102
▫ Front Seat Manual Seat Adjustment ........102
▫ Front Seats Manual Seat Recliners ..........103
▫ Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment — If
Equipped ...........................103
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints — All Seating
Positions ...........................104
▫ 8 - Way Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped . .104
▫ 4 - Way Passenger’s Power Seat — If
Equipped ...........................105
▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped .........105
▫ Second Row 40/20/40 Seat — Fold And
Tumble ............................106
▫ Third Row Seat Bench — If Equipped .......109
▫ Third Seat 50/50 Split Seat — If Equipped . . . 111
䡵 Driver Memory System — If Equipped .......114
▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking Remote
Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory .......115
▫ Memory Position Recall .................116
▫ To Disable A Transmitter Linked To Memory . . 116
▫ Self-Limiting Control ...................117
▫ Driver Easy Exit And Easy Entry Control ....117
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse .................118
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood .............118
䡵 Lights ...............................120
▫ Interior Lights .......................121
▫ Battery Saver ........................121
70 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Headlight Delay ......................122
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .......122
▫ Headlights, Parking Lights, Panel Lights .....123
▫ Illuminated Entry .....................123
▫ Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only) .....123
▫ Lights-On Reminder ...................124
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped ...............124
䡵 Multifunction Control Lever ...............124
▫ Turn Signals .........................125
▫ Passing Light ........................125
▫ High Beam / Low Beam Select Switch ......126
▫ Windshield Wipers ....................126
▫ Windshield Washers ...................127
䡵 Traction Control Switch — If Equipped .......128
䡵 Tilt Steering Column ....................129
䡵 Driver Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped ......130
▫ Adjustment .........................131
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped ......132
▫ To Activate ..........................132
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed ...............132
▫ To Deactivate ........................132
▫ To Resume Speed .....................133
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............133
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ...............134
䡵 Overhead Console ......................135
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights ................136
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 71
3
䡵 Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer ....136
▫ US/M Button ........................136
▫ Reset Button .........................137
▫ Global Reset .........................137
▫ Step Button .........................138
▫ Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO) ........138
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) ...............138
▫ Trip Odometer (ODO) ..................139
▫ Elapsed Time (ET) .....................139
▫ C/T Button .........................139
▫ Compass/Temperature Display ...........140
▫ Automatic Compass Calibration ...........140
▫ Manual Compass Calibration .............140
▫ To Put Into a Calibration Mode ...........140
▫ Outside Temperature ...................142
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped .........142
▫ Programming Homelink ................144
▫ Canadian Programming/Gate Programming . .146
▫ Using Homelink ......................147
▫ Erasing Homelink Buttons ...............147
▫ Reprogramming a Single Homelink Button . . .148
▫ Security ............................148
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped .............149
▫ Express Open Feature ..................149
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................150
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ...................151
72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets ..................151
▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
(Battery Fed Configuration) ..............152
䡵 Floor Console .........................153
▫ Floor Console Features .................153
䡵 Factory Installed Roof Luggage Rack— If
Equipped ............................155
䡵 Cargo Management System—If Equipped ......156
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73
3
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window. A two-point pivot system
allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the
mirror.
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of truck). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror will automatically adjust for annoying head-
light glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the
feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
mirror. A light in the button will indicate when the
dimming feature is activated. This option also controls
the driver’s side mirror when it is equipped with auto
dimming glass.
74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the
mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and
wipe the mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
Folding exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved
either forward or rearward to resist damage.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75
3
Electric Remote-Control Mirrors
The controls for the power mirrors are located on the
driver’s door trim panel.
To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left
or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand
in the direction you want the mirror to move. When
finished adjusting the mirror, turn the control to the
center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror.
76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your right
side mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the
right side mirror.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automati-
cally. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
Heated mirrors are automatically activated when you
depress the rear window defroster switch located on the
instrument panel. The light will illuminate to indicate
that the heating elements are ON. Turning OFF the
ignition will deactivate the heated mirrors.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77
3
Automatic Dimming Driver’s Exterior Mirror — If
Equipped
This mirror will automatically adjust for annoying light
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside mirror and can be turned off by pressing the
button at the base of the inside mirror.
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —
IF EQUIPPED
UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in vehicle
communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial
a phone number with your cellular phone* using simple
voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call ѧ Mike ѧWork⬙ or ⬙Dial ѧ
248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is transmitted
through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will
automatically mute your radio when using the UCon-
nect™ system.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
version 0.96 or higher.
For UConnect Customer Support call 1-877-855-8400 or
visit the UConnect website (www.chrysler.com/
uconnect).
UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s micro-
phone for private conversation.
The UConnect™ phonebook enables you to store up to 32
names and four numbers per name. Each language has a
separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your Blue-
tooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect™
features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard
that enables different electronic devices to connect to
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
each other without wires or a docking station, so UCon-
nect works no matter where you stow your cellular
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as
your phone is turned on and has been paired to the
vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system.
Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).
The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the
system and the control buttons that will enable you to
access the system. The diagram below shows the mirror
with the appropriate buttons. Individual button behavior
is discussed in the ⬙Operation⬙ section.
The UConnect™ system can be used with any Hands-
Free Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. If your
cellular phone supports a different profile (eg., Headset
Profile), you may not be able to use any UConnect™
features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the
phone manufacturer for details.
UConnect™ Switches
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79
3
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the
vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™
system can either be adjusted from the radio volume
control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control
(right switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect™ system such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™
system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the voice on beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt
or another prompt.
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
For each of the feature explanation in this section, only
the combined form of the voice command is given.
You can also break the commands into parts and say
each part of the command, when you are asked for it.
For example, you can either use the combined form
voice command ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can
break the combined form command into two voice
commands: ⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please re-
member, the UConnect™ system works best when you
talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to
some one sitting eight feet away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section.
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to
know what your options are at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙
following the voice on beep. The UConnect™ system will
play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply
press the ’Phone’ button and follow audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a
press of the ’Phone’ button on the mirror.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the voice on beep, you can say
⬙Cancel⬙ and you will be returned to the main menu.
However, in a few instances the system will take you
back to the previous menu.
Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone (re-
fer to ⬙Introduction⬙ section to learn about the phone
type). To complete the pairing process, you will need to
reference your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the
following vehicle specific websites may also provide
detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone
that you have:
NOTE:
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
•
www.dodge.com/uconnect
•
www.jeep.com/uconnect
The following are general phone to UConnect™ System
pairing instructions:
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
When prompted, after the voice on beep, say ⬙Pair a
Phone.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
3
•
You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number which
you will later need to enter into your cellular. You can
enter any four-digit pin number. You will not need to
remember this pin number after the initial pairing
process.
•
The UConnect™ system will then prompt you to begin
the cellular phone pairing process on your cellular
phone. Before attempting to pair phone, please see
your cellular phone’s user manual (Bluetooth section)
for instructions on how to complete this step.
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the
UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to ⬙Advanced Phone
Connectivity⬙ section).
Dial by Saying a Number
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
•
System will prompt you to say the number you want
call.
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901.⬙ The phone
number that you enter must be of valid length and
combination. The UConnect™ limits the user from
dialing invalid combination of numbers. For example,
234-567-890 is nine digits long, which is not a valid
phone number - the closest valid phone number has
ten digits.
•
The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone num-
ber and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Call.⬙
•
System will prompt you to say the name of the person
you want call.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phone-
book. Refer to section ⬙Add Names to Your UCon-
nect™ Phonebook,⬙ to learn how to store a name in the
phonebook.
•
The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
3
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and is recom-
mended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or ⬙Robert⬙
instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.:
⬙Home,⬙⬙Work,⬙⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
•
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible
only in that language.
Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
•
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
•
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
return to the main menu.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s
work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ feature.
Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the ⬙Voice Recognition⬙ button
while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired
entry and say ⬙Delete.⬙
•
After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile or pager. Say the designation you wish
to delete.
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be de-
leted. Note that only the phonebook in the current
language is deleted.
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
3
•
The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
•
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
•
The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries.
•
To call one of the names in the list, press the ⬙Voice
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
name and say ⬙Call⬙. NOTE: the user can also exercise
⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙ operations at this point.
•
The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to
number designation you wish to call.
•
The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio
system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. To reject the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button
until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming
call was rejected.
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call. NOTE: The
UConnect™ system compatible phones in market today
do not support rejecting an incoming call when another
call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only either
answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call while Current Call in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or
⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
to section ⬙Toggling Between Two Calls.⬙ To combine two
calls, refer to section ⬙Conference Call.⬙
Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold
To put a call on hold, press the ⬘Phone’ button until you
hear a single beep which will indicate that the call has
been placed on hold. To bring the call back from hold,
press and hold the ⬘Phone’ button until you hear a single
beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
3
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recogni-
tion’ button while a call is in progress and make a second
phone call as described in section ⬙Making a Second Call
while Current Call in Progress.⬙ After the second call has
established, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you
hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the ⬘Phone’
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
Redial
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
•
The UConnect™ system will call the last number that
was dialed on your cellular phone. Note: this may not
be the last number dialed from the UConnect™ sys-
tem.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has
been switched to off. Call continuation functionality
available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
•
After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of
the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the
call to the mobile phone.
•
After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the
UConnect™ system to the mobile phone.
•
An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
UConnect™ System Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
using,
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change op-
eration, only the language specific 32 name phonebook is
usable. The phone pairing is not language specific and
usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
3
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the UConnect™ system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is only supported in the USA.
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA/
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number called may not
be applicable with the available cellular service and area.
The UConnect™ system does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell
phone directly.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UCon-
nect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature in
emergency situations when the cell phone has network
coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™ system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance,
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-
528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
for Mexico city and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
city in Mexico).
Please refer to the 24-Hour Towing Assistance coverage
details in the DaimlerChrysler Corporation 24-Hour
Towing Assistance Program Guide.
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to section ⬙Working with
Automated Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for
pagers of certain companies which time-out a little too
soon to work properly with the UConnect™ system.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to section
⬙Working with Automated Systems.⬙
Working with Automated Systems
This method is designed to be used in instances where
one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone
keypad while navigating through an automated tele-
phone system.
You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voice-
mail system or an automated service, such as, paging
service or automated customer service. Some services
require immediate response selection, in some instances,
that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system.
When calling a number with your UConnect™ system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push
the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you
wish to enter followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example,
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
pound3746#,youcanpressthe’Voice Recognition’
button and say ⬙3746#Send.⬙ Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send⬙ is also to be
used to navigate through an automated customer service
center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is playing ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
aѧ,⬙ you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and
say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
3
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g. the UConnect™ sys-
tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The UConnect™ system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
The UConnect™ system will provide notification to
inform you if your cellular phone is in roaming status,
has low signal strength, or has a low battery when you
are trying to place a phone call.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while
dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the
same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)
When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect™ system:
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Mute.⬙
In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system:
•
Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Mute-off.⬙
Information Service
When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone
number ⬙#121,⬙ you can access voice activated automated
system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc.
related information.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be
transferred to your cellular phone to the UConnect™
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongo-
ing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to
the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the ’Voice
Recognition’ button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue-
tooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired cellular
phone and the UConnect™ system, follow the instruction
described in your cellular phone user’s manual.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
3
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone pairing”.
•
When prompted, say ⬙List Phones⬙.
•
The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the ⬘Voice recognition’
button and say “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see next two
sections for alternate way of doing this.
Select another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must
have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system
that you want to use it with.
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone.⬙
•
The phone names (along with priority numbers) will
be played.
•
When prompted say the priority number of the cellu-
lar phone you wish to select. You can also press the
⬘Voice Recognition’ button anytime while the list is
being played and say the priority number.
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the UCon-
nect™ system will return to using the highest priority
phone present in or near (approximately with in 30
feet) the vehicle.
Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete.⬙
•
The phone names (along with priority numbers) will
be played.
•
When prompted say the priority number of the cellu-
lar phone (or “All” to delete all phones) you wish to
delete. You can also press the ⬘Voice Recognition’
button anytime while the list is being played and say
the priority number.
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™
System
Voice Recognition (VR)
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
away from you.
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
•
Performance is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather condition.
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English and Spanish accents, the
system may not always work for some.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
3
•
When navigating through an automated system, such
as, voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙send.⬙
•
Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in
motion is recommended.
•
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect™ phonebook.
•
UConnect™ phonebook name tag recognition rate is
optimized for the person who stored the name in the
phonebook.
•
You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
•
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
Far End Audio Performance
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows, and
•
dry weather condition.
•
Operation from driver seat.
•
Performance, such as, audio clarity, echo. and loud-
ness to a large degree, rely on the phone and network,
and not the UConnect™ system.
•
Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Bluetooth Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to occasionally loose
connection to the UConnect™ system. When this hap-
pens, the connection can generally be re-established by
switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recom-
mended to remain in Bluetooth ⬙on⬙ mode.
Reset
In rare instances, it may be necessary to reset the UCon-
nect™ system. The reset feature is exercised by pressing
and holding the ’UConnect™ ’ and ’Voice Recognition’
buttons simultaneously for 15 seconds. Normally, you do
not need to exercise this feature.
Power-Up
After switching ignition key from off to either On orACC
position, or after a reset, you must wait at least five (5)
seconds prior to using the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
3
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
3
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
North American English
Primary Alternate(s)
Zero Oh
Add location Add new
All All of them
Confirmation prompts Confirmations prompts
Delete a name Delete
Language Select language
List names List all
List paired phones List phones
Pager Beeper
Phone pairing Pairing
Phonebook Phone book
Return to main menu Return. Main menu
Select phone select
Set up Phone settings phone set
up
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
3
SEATS
Front Seat Manual Seat Adjustment
The adjusting lever is at the front of the seat, near the
floor. Lift the lever and move the seat to the desired
position. Release the bar to lock the seat into position.
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Seats Manual Seat Recliners
The bucket seats are equipped with recliners. The reclin-
ing mechanism is operated by a lever located on the right
side of the passenger’s seat and the left side of the
driver’s seat. To recline, lean forward slightly before
lifting the lever, then push back to the desired position
and release the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to
return the seatback to its normal position. Using body
pressure, lean forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure the seatback is locked.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment — If
Equipped
The manual lumbar support adjustment lever is located
on the right side of the driver’s seat and on the left side
of the passenger’s seat. Moving the lumbar control lever
fore and aft increases or decreases the lumbar support.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
3
Adjustable Head Restraints — All Seating
Positions
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down
on the restraints so that the upper edge is as high as
practical, at least to the level of the ears.
To lower the head restraint, depress the release button
located at the base of the head restraint and push down
on the head restraint.
8 - Way Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped
The driver’s power seat switches are located on the left
side of the driver’s seat lower side trim. The bottom
switch controls up/down, forward/rearward, and tilt
adjustment. The top switch controls the seatback recline
adjustment.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4 - Way Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped
The front passenger’s power seat switches are located on
the right side of the passenger seat lower side trim. The
bottom switch controls forward/rearward adjustment.
The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment.
NOTE: The 4 - way seat does not have an up/down
adjustment.
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
This feature heats the driver and front passenger seats.
The controls for the front heated seats are located on the
center of the instrument panel, below the climate con-
trols. The heated seat system allows the driver and front
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
3
passenger to select from two different levels of supple-
mental electrical seat heating, or no seat heating to suit
their individual comfort requirements.
With the ignition switch in the RUN position, depressing
the heated seat switch rocker to its momentary High or
Low position provides power to the heated seat element
and maintains the requested temperature setting. If the
heated seat switch is depressed to a different position
(Low or High) than the currently selected state, the
requested temperature setting will change to a new
selection. If the heated seat switch is depressed a second
time to the same position as the currently selected state,
the seat heater will turn off.
NOTE: The high heat setting will operate for approxi-
mately a two hour duration. After two hours, the system
will automatically transition to the low heat setting. The
low heat setting will operate for a two hour duration,
then the system will turn off. Thus, a maximum of four
hours of operation until the system is reactivated.
If the low heat setting is initially selected, the system will
operate for two hours and then turn off.
If the indicator lamp on the heated seat switch does not
light when the switch is depressed or if heated seats does
not operate, the system should be serviced by a qualified
technician.
Second Row 40/20/40 Seat — Fold and Tumble
The 40/20/40 seat configuration is standard on all mod-
els. This seat is equipped with a unique fold-and-tumble
feature. The 40 % seatbacks have spring loaded hinges
which assist with the folding of the seatbacks.
Second row leather seats have seatback recliners at the
40% seating positions. Raising the lever allows the seat-
back to be reclined an additional 11degrees.
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Fold the 40% seatbacks fully raise the lever on the side
of the seat to release the seatback. The seatback can now
be folded into the down position for use as a cargo floor,
or the seat can now be tumbled forward to allow access
to the rear of the vehicle.
To fold the 20% seatback, pull the strap forward to release
the seatback. Fold the seatback down for use as an
armrest or to carry cargo. When returning the seatback to
the upright position, push the seatback rearward to latch
the seatback. Pull the seatback forward to ensure that it is
locked in the upright position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
3
WARNING!
The 20% seatback contains the center shoulder belt.
A 20% seatback that is not fully latched in the
upright position will not protect you properly.
To Tumble the 40% seat, fully raise the lever on the side
of the seat to release the floor latches and tumble the seat.
NOTE: The seatback must be fully folded into the down
position to allow the lever to be raised enough to release
the floor latches.
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Fold and Tumble the 2nd row 40% seats from the 3rd
row, fully raise the lever at the rear of the seat to fold the
seatback. Continue raising the lever to release the floor
latches to tumble the seat.
NOTE: The head restraints must be lowered but do not
have to be removed to fold and tumble the seats.
Third Row Seat Bench — If Equipped
To Fold The Seats
Folding the third seat occurs in two stages: First the
cushion is lifted and moved forward from the pockets at
the front of the cushion. The cushion will rest onto the
floor directly behind the second row seat. Second, the top
of the back is folded forward and rests onto the cushion.
The back will not fold unless the cushion has been folded
forward first.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
3
To Achieve Maximum Cargo Capacity
Pull the release handles and strap on the second row
seats and fold flat. After folding the third row seat,
unsnap the flipper panel on the third row seatback and
flip it forward on the backs of the second row seats.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Before returning the second row 40% seats to
their upright position, always snap the third row seat
flipper panel(s) back to the third row seat first.
NOTE: The seat belt buckles are hinged to fold with the
seat back.
WARNING!
Do not sit in the third row seat unless the cushion
and back are properly engaged. Proper engagement
can be verified by pushing/pulling on the upright
seatback. The seatback will not move unless prop-
erly engaged.
Do not sit in the 3rd row seat with the second row
seatback(s) folded or tumbled. In a collision, you
could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or
even fatally injured.
Third Seat 50/50 Split Seat — If Equipped
To Fold The Seat(s)
Pull up the release handle(s) and move the seatback
forward. This can be performed from either the front or
rear of the third row seats. The seatback and seat cushion
move simultaneously into load floor position and rests
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
3
on the floor behind the second row seats.The seat belt
buckles are hinged and fold with the seatbacks.
To Achieve Maximum Cargo Capacity
Pull the release handles and strap on the second row
seats and fold flat. After folding the third row seats,
unsnap the flipper panels on the back of the third row
seatbacks and flip the panels onto the backs of the second
row seats.
NOTE: Before returning the second row 40% seats the
upright position, always reposition the flipper panel(s)
and snap onto the third row seat first.
NOTE: The seat belt buckles are hinged to fold with the
seat backs.
To Return The Seat(s) To An Upright Position
If required, unsnap the strap(s). Pull on the seatback from
the rear of the vehicle to reposition the seat(s) to an
upright position. Reposition strap onto the hook and loop
material on the seat back and snap strap(s).
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not sit in the third row seat unless the cushion
and back are properly engaged. Proper engagement
can be verified by pushing/pulling on the upright
seatback. The seatback(s) will not move unless prop-
erly engaged.
Do not sit in the 3rd row seat(s) with the second row
seatback(s) folded or tumbled. In a collision, you
could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or
even fatally injured.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
3
DRIVER MEMORY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Once programmed, the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the
driver’s door panel can be used to recall the driver’s seat
position, driver’s outside mirror position, adjustable
brake and accelerator pedals position, Automatic Tem-
perature Control (ATC) temperature and radio station
preset settings. Your Remote Keyless Entry transmitters
can also be programmed to recall the same positions
when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
Your vehicle was delivered with two Remote Keyless
Entry transmitters. One or both transmitters can be
linked to either memory position. The memory system
can accommodate up to two transmitters, each transmit-
ter linked to either of the two memory positions.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Setting Memory Positions and Linking Remote
Keyless Entry Transmitter to Memory
NOTE: Each time the SET (S) button and a numbered
button (1 or 2) are pressed, you erase the memory settings
for that button and store new settings.
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and both side view
mirrors to the desired positions.
NOTE: Not all motors may be moved at one time.
Please refer to the 8-way power seat description.
2. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired
positions.
3. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up
to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set).
4. Adjust the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
while the ATC is in Auto mode.
5. Press and release the SET (S) button located on the
driver’s door.
6. Within 5 seconds, press and release memory button 1
or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must be per-
formed within 10 seconds if you desire to also use a
Remote Keyless Entry transmitter to recall memory po-
sitions.
7. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the
transmitters.
8. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to
the ON position.
9. Repeat the above steps to set the next memory posi-
tion using the other numbered memory button or to link
another Remote Keyless Entry transmitter to memory.
NOTE: A chime sound may be heard if Setting Memory
was inhibited for any reason.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
3
Memory Position Recall
NOTE:
•
The driver’s seat belt must be unbuckled to recall
memory positions.
•
The vehicle must be in Park to recall memory posi-
tions.
•
Not all motors may be moved at one time. Please refer
to the 8-way power seat description.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
memory button number 1 on the driver’s door or the
Unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter
linked to memory position 1.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
memory button number 2 on the driver’s door or the
Unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter
linked to memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the memory
buttons on the drivers door during a recall (S, 1, or 2), or
pressing any one of the power seat buttons, or pressing
the adjustable pedals button, or pressing either the LOCK
or UNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry trans-
mitter when not in the ignition switch. When a recall is
cancelled, the driver’s seat, and the pedals stop moving.
Adelay of one second will occur before another recall can
be selected.
NOTE: A chime sound may be heard if Setting Memory
was inhibited for any reason.
To Disable A Transmitter Linked to Memory
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
remove the key.
2. Press and release the memory SET (S) button located
on the driver’s door.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Within 10 seconds, press and release the UNLOCK
button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter.
To disable another transmitter linked to either memory
position, repeat steps 1-3 for each transmitter.
NOTE: The capability to link Remote Keyless Entry
transmitters to memory is enabled when delivered from
the factory. The capability to link Remote Keyless Entry
transmitters to memory can be disabled (or later reen-
abled) by a qualified DaimlerChrysler representative.
Self-Limiting Control
To improve vehicle reliability, the memory system in-
cludes a self-limiting control for full travel positioning of
power seat and Adjustable Pedal movement (all direc-
tions). This self-limiting control may however develop an
unintended movement limitation if an obstruction is
encountered at sometime during usage. One example of
such an occurrence may include a box or package ob-
structing the full rearward movement of the driver’s seat.
Once the obstruction is removed, the self-limiting control
may be restored to maximum position. The self-limiting
control may be restored by first reaching the recently
limited or obstructed position, then release and reactivate
the same button or buttons. Continued seat travel beyond
the obstructed position will indicate the recently encoun-
tered self-limitation has been cleared.
Driver Easy Exit and Easy Entry Control
This additional feature provides automatic driver’s seat
positioning which will enhance driver mobility out of
and into the vehicle. The seat cushion will move rear-
ward approximately 2.5 inches (60 mm) when the key is
removed from the ignition switch. The seat will move
forward approximately 2.5 inches (60 mm) when the key
is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK
position. Each stored memory setting will have an asso-
ciated Easy Exit and Easy Entry position. The Easy Exit
and Easy Entry feature may be automatically disabled if
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
3
the seat is positioned rearward enough and no benefit
from moving the seat any farther rearward.
NOTE: The Easy Exit Easy Entry feature is not enabled
when delivered from the factory. The Easy Exit Easy
Entry feature may be enabled (or later disabled) by a
qualified DaimlerChrysler service representative.
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse
This additional feature provides automatic outside mir-
ror positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors
will move slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into Reverse position. The
outside mirrors will then return to the original position
when the vehicle is shifted out of Reverse position. Each
stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mir-
rors in Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not en-
abled when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature may be enabled (or later disabled) by a
qualified DaimlerChrysler service representative.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull
the hood release lever located under the left side of the
instrument panel.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Then push the safety latch lever to the left. It is located
between the grille and hood opening right of the center.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center front
edge of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed,
with both latches engaged.
NOTE: Ensure hood prop rod is fully seated into clip
before closing hood to prevent damage to grille.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before
driving.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
3
LIGHTS
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the right side of the switch) is rotated to the
second upward detent position, or when the UNLOCK
button is pressed on the key fob. When a door is open
and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer control
all the way down to the OFF detent will cause all the
interior lights to go out. This allows the doors to stay
open for extended periods of time without discharging
the vehicle’s battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are ON you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odom-
eter, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
up until you hear a click. This feature is termed the
⬙Parade⬙ mode and is useful when headlights are re-
quired during the day.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, Load Shed-
ding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is off and any door is left ajar for eight
minutes or the dimmer control is rotated upwards for 15
minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
3
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
off, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after 8
minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on for 8
minutes while the ignition is off, the exterior lights will
automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery Saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
NOTE: While the engine is running, the system will
deactivate the Fog Lights and Heated seats if a low
battery system voltage is detected.
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for 90
seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is
cycled off while the headlight switch is on, and then the
headlight switch is cycled off. The headlights will remain
on for 90 seconds. Headlight delay can be cancelled by
either turning the headlight switch ON then OFF or by
turning the ignition ON.
NOTE: This feature can be disabled by your authorized
dealer.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
Automatic Headlights can be activated by rotating the
rotary headlight switch to the symbol “A.” The head-
lights will turn on when the engine is running and the
ambient light sensor indicates that the headlights should
be activated. The headlights will turn off if the headlight
switch is rotated to the off position or 90 seconds after the
ignition is turned to OFF.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights, Parking Lights, Panel Lights
When the headlight switch is rotated to the first position
to the right, the parking lights, taillights, side marker
lights, license plate light and instrument panel lights are
all turned on. The headlights will turn ON when the
switch is rotated to the second position.
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight lenses
that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses.
Illuminated Entry
Headlights turn on for 90 seconds, when the Remote
Keyless Entry UNLOCK button is pressed.
NOTE: This feature can be activated by your authorized
dealer.
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only)
The headlights on your Durango will illuminate when
the engine is started. This provides a constant “Lights
ON” condition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights
illuminate at reduced intensity. If the parking brake is
applied the Daytime Running Lights will turn off. If the
headlights are activated, the Daytime Running Lights
feature will transition to the normal headlight operating
mode.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
3
Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or courtesy lights are left
On, after the ignition is turned Off, a continuous fast
chime will sound when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The foglights are turned ON by placing the headlight
rotary control in the parking light, headlight, or Auto
position and pressing the fog light button. The fog lights
will operate only when the parking lights are ON or
when the vehicle headlights are ON low beam. An
indicator light located in the instrument cluster will
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
turn off when the switch is pressed in, when the head-
light switch is rotated to the OFF position, or the high
beam is selected.
MULTIFUNCTION CONTROL LEVER
The multifunction control lever is located on the left side
of the steering column.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
Move the lever up or down to signal a right-hand or
left-hand turn.
The arrow on either side of the instrument cluster flashes
to indicate the direction of the turn, and proper operation
of the front and rear turn signal lights. If an indicator fails
to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that
the switch or indicator lamp is defective.
If a defective bulb or wiring circuit is detected for the
turn signal system, the arrow indicators will flash at a
faster rate.
You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down.
NOTE: If a turn signal has been left on for at least a mile
duration, a continuous chime will sound.
Passing Light
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
3
High Beam / Low Beam Select Switch
Pull the multifunction control lever fully toward the
steering wheel to switch the headlights from HIGH or
LOW beam.
Windshield Wipers
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the
multifunction control lever. Turn the end of the handle to
select the desired wiper speed.
Intermittent Wiper System
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For
maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
into the upper end of the delay range.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
it enters the LO continual speed position. The delay can
be regulated from a maximum of about 15 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every 2 seconds. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km) or less.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during wind-
shield washer use.
NOTE: If the front wiper is operating when the ignition
is turned off, the wiper will automatically return to the
⬙Park⬙ position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wipers
will resume operation.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push in on the washer knob on the end
of the multifunction control lever and hold while spray is
desired. If the washer knob is depressed while in the
delay range, the wiper will operate for several seconds
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
3
after the washer knob is released. It will then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected. If the washer
knob is pushed, for a period greater than 1 second, while
in the OFF position, the wiper will wipe approximately
three wipes, after the wash knob is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH — IF EQUIPPED
Traction control monitors the amount of wheel spin in
each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the
pressure to the brake system of the slipping wheel(s) is
modulated to provide enhanced acceleration. The system
operates at speeds typically encountered in city traffic
driving. 4WD drive models also include unique logic in
4HI or 4LO to enhance off-road capabilities.
The traction control Indicator, located in the instrument
cluster, will light up when the Traction Control is in use.
To turn the system OFF, press the Traction Control
switch, located below the climate controls in the center
stack, until the traction control Indicator in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the system back ON, press the switch a second
time until the traction control Indicator turns OFF.
NOTE:
•
The traction control Indicator comes on each time the
ignition switch is turned ON. This will occur even if
you used the switch to turn the system OFF.
•
The Traction Control system will make buzzing or
clicking sounds when in operation.
TILT STEERING COLUMN
To tilt the column, push down on the lever below the turn
signal control and move the wheel up or down, as
desired.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
3
WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-
umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-
hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The power adjustable accelerator and brake pedals allow
the driver to establish a comfortable position relative to
the steering wheel and pedals.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustment
1. Position the driver seat so that you are at least 10
inches (254 mm) away from the airbag located in the
center of the steering wheel.
2. Fasten and adjust the seatbelts.
3. Move the adjustable pedal switch, located to the left of
the steering column near the parking brake release, up to
move the pedals toward the driver or down to move the
pedals away from the driver.
4. The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
R (Reverse) or when the Speed Control is SET.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become
limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in
the adjustable pedal’s path.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
3
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, this device takes over accelerator opera-
tion at speeds greater than (refer to the table below for
the speed for your specific engine). The controls are
mounted on the steering wheel.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to the ON position. In the
instrument cluster, the word “CRUISE” illuminates when
the system is on.
To Set At A Desired Speed
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
and release the SET button. Release the accelerator and
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Deactivate
Asoft tap on the brake pedal, normal braking, or pressing
the CANCEL button will deactivate speed control with-
out erasing the memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button to
the OFF position or turning off the ignition erases the
memory.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control ON when not in use is
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system to
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the
system OFF when you aren’t using it.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push and release the
RESUME button. Resume can be used at any speed above
(refer to the table below for the speed for your specific
engine).
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the speed control is on, speed can be increased by
pressing and holding the ACCEL button. When the
button is released, a new set speed will be established.
Tapping the ACCEL button once will result in a speed
increase (refer to the table below for the speed for your
specific engine). Each time the button is tapped, speed
increases so that tapping the button three times will
increase speed by three increments.
Tapping the DECEL button once will result in a speed
decrease (refer to the table below for the speed for your
specific engine). Each time the button is tapped, speed
will decrease. For example, tapping the button 3 times
will decrease the speed by 3 times the speed listed in the
table below (refer to the table below for the speed for
your specific engine).
To decrease speed while the speed control is on, press
and hold the DECEL button. Release the button when the
desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
3
Functions 3.7L 4.7L 5.7L
Engage Speed 35 mph (56 km/h) 35 mph (56 km/h) 25 mph (40 km/h)
Minimun RESUME Speed 30 mph (50 km/h) 30 mph (50 km/h) 20 mph (32 km/h)
ACCEL Increase 2 mph (3km/h) 2 mph (3km/h) 1 mph (2 km/h)
DECEL Decrease 1 mph (2 km/h) 1 mph (2 km/h) 1 mph (2 km/h)
Dropout Speed 30 mph (50 km/h) 30 mph (50 km/h) 20 mph (32 km/h)
To Accelerate For Passing
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
NOTE: When driving uphill, at elevations above 2,000
feet (610 meters), or when the vehicle is heavily loaded
(especially when towing) the vehicle may slow below the
SET speed. If the vehicle speed drops below (refer to the
table below for the speed for your specific engine), the
speed control will automatically disengage. If this hap-
pens, you can push down on the accelerator pedal to
maintain the desired speed.
Vehicles equipped with a Automatic transmission may
exhibit several downshifts under the above conditions.
To reduce the frequency of the downshifts and to im-
prove vehicle performance, it is advisable to lock out
overdrive by pressing the “TOW/HAUL” button located
at the end of the gear shifter.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console has the following features:
•
Courtesy Lights
•
Garage Door Opener — If Equipped
•
Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer — If
Equipped
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
3
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Near the front of the console are two courtesy/reading
lights.
Both lights illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is
opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the
courtesy light position (fully upward position), or when
the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless
Entry transmitter, if so equipped. These lights are also
operated individually as reading lights by pressing the
recessed area of the corresponding lens.
NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the vehicle is turned OFF, they will
extinguish after 15 minutes.
COMPASS/TEMPERATURE MINI-TRIP COMPUTER
This feature allows you to choose between a compass/
temperature display and one of four trip conditions being
monitored.
US/M Button
Use this button to change the display from U.S. to metric
measurement units.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
RESET Button
When this button is pressed you will hear a confirmation
beep. Use this button to reset the following displays to
zero:
Average Fuel Economy
Trip Odometer
Elapsed time.
Global Reset
If the RESET button and STEP button are pressed at the
same time and held for 3 seconds (you will hear a
confirmation beep) and the Global Reset feature will reset
the distance to empty (using a default fuel economy
value), fuel economy, trip odometer, and elapsed time
displays.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
3
Step Button
Use this button to choose or cycle through the four trip
conditions.
Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO)
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. This
display mode becomes less sensitive to instantaneous
changes in fuel consumption as the number of total
vehicle miles since the last reset increases. It is suggested
that this mode be reset periodically for general operation
or when driving conditions change significantly (for
example, at the end of a trip or when a trailer is
connected or disconnected).
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. The estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level.
When Distance To Empty = 0, the fuel gauge pointer will
initially be on the red “E” marker. At this point (fuel
gauge pointer on the the red “E” marker) there is reserve
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
fuel capacity, which corresponds to approximately 5% of
tank volume. This reserve capacity was put in place to
prevent the likelihood of customers running out of fuel
when operating at maximum load conditions in areas
where there aren’t many gas stations.
NOTE: The Distance To Empty will remain equal to
zero, until the vehicle runs out of fuel or is refueled.
Trip Odometer (ODO)
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset.
Elapsed Time (ET)
This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time
since the last reset.
C/T Button
Use this button to select a readout of the outside tem-
perature and one of eight compass headings that indicate
the direction in which the vehicle is facing.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
3
Compass/Temperature Display
WARNING!
Even if the display still reads a few degrees above
32°F ( 0°C), the road surface may be icy, particularly
in woods or on bridges. Drive carefully under such
conditions to prevent an accident and possible per-
sonal injury or property damage.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating which eliminates the
need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the CAL
symbol will be displayed.
After completing one 360° turn, with the vehicle traveling
less than 5 mph (8 km/h), in an area free from large metal
or metallic objects, the CAL symbol will turn off and the
compass will function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
NOTE: To ensure proper compass calibration, make
sure the compass variance is properly set before manu-
ally calibrating the compass.
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL symbol does
not appear, you must manually put the compass into the
“Calibration” mode.
To Put Into a Calibration Mode
Turn on the ignition and set the display to “Compass/
Temperature.” Press and hold the RESET button for 5
seconds to change the display to VAR (compass variance)
mode, holding the button 5 additional seconds will
display CAL (compass calibration) mode. When the CAL
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
symbol is displayed complete one 360 degree turn in an
area free from large metal objects or power lines. The
CAL symbol will turn off and the compass will function
normally.
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
north and geographic north. In some areas of the country,
the difference between magnetic and geographic north is
great enough to cause the compass to give false readings.
If this occurs, the compass variance must be set according
to the Compass Variance Map.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
3
To set the variance: Turn the ignition ON and set the
display to “Compass/Temperature.” Press and hold the
RESET button approximately five seconds. The last vari-
ance zone number will be displayed. Press the STEP
button to select the new variance zone and press the
RESET button to resume normal operation.
Outside Temperature
Because the ambient temperature sensor is located un-
derhood, engine temperature can influence the displayed
temperature, therefore, temperature readings are slowly
updated when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (30
km/h) or during stop and go driving.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver replaces up to
three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that oper-
ate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the
push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off
your vehicle’s battery and charging system; no batteries
are needed.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For additional information on HomeLink威, call 1–800–
355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
WARNING!
A moving garage door can cause injury to people and
pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be
seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by federal safety stan-
dards. This includes most garage door opener mod-
els manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage
door opener without these safety features it could
cause injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.homelink.com for safety
information or assistance.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
3
Programming HomeLink
NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, it is
advised to park outside the garage. It is also recom-
mended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to
HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal.
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons, and
release only when the indicator lights (two dots below
House Symbol ) begin to flash (after 20 seconds). Do not
hold the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat step one to program a second and/or third hand-
held transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink but-
tons.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-
ous injury or death.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can
cause serious injury or death to people and pets or
damage to objects.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3
inches (3-8 cm) away from the HomeLink buttons while
keeping the indicator light (dots below House Symbol) in
view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink
button that you want to train and the hand-held trans-
mitter buttons. Do not release the buttons until step 4
has been completed.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with
procedures noted in the ⬙Gate Operator/Canadian Pro-
gramming⬙ section.
4. The HomeLink indicator light (dots below House
Symbol) will flash slowly and then rapidly after
HomeLink successfully receives the frequency signal
from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons
after the indicator light changes from the slow to the
rapid flash.
5. Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light. If the indicator light stays on
constantly, programming is complete and your device
should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed
and released.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink but-
tons, begin with ⬙Programming⬙ step two. Do not repeat
step one.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
3
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and
then turns to a constant light, continue with ⴖProgram-
mingⴖ steps 6-8 to complete the programming of a rolling
code equipped device (most commonly a garage door
opener).
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit)
in the garage, locate the ⬙learn⬙ or ⬙smart⬙ button. This
can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the ⬙learn⬙ or ⬙smart⬙ button.
(The name and color of the button may vary by manu-
facturer.)
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step
eight.
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two
seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button.
Repeat the ⴖpress/hold/releaseⴖ sequence a second time,
and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener
(or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code
equipped device.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink but-
tons, begin with ⬙Programming⬙ step two. Do not repeat
step one. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to ⬙time-out⬙ (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to ⬙time-out⬙ in the same manner.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties
programming a gate operator by using the ⬙Program-
ming⬙ procedures (regardless of where you live), replace
ⴖProgramming HomeLinkⴖ step 3 with the following:
NOTE: If programming a garage door opener or gate
operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the
⬙cycling⬙ process to prevent possible overheating.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release every two seconds (⬙cycle⬙)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
successfully been accepted by HomeLink. (The indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly.) Proceed with
⬙Programming⬙ step four to complete.
Using HomeLink
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
device may also be used at any time. In the event that
there are still programming difficulties or questions,
contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-
3515.
Erasing HomeLink Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons (individual
buttons cannot be erased but can be ⬙reprogrammed⬙ -
note below), follow the step noted:
•
Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash-after 20 seconds.
Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer that 30
seconds. HomeLink is now in the train (or learning)
mode and can be programmed at any time beginning
with ⬙Programming⬙ - step 2.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
3
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button
To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink
button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds.
Without releasing the HomeLink button, proceed with
⬙Programming⬙ step 2
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
Security
Garage Door Opener Operation with Security
Alarm (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the Security Alarm
feature, the operation of the HomeLink feature will be
purposely inhibited if the Security Alarm is ⬙Armed⬙.
This prevents HomeLink operation due to un-authorized
vehicle entry. HomeLink operation will be re-stored
when the Security Alarm has been ⬙Disarmed⬙.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies.
To erase all of the previously trained frequencies, hold
down both outside buttons until the 2 dots below House
Symbol begin to flash (about 20 seconds).
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
HomeLink威 is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,
Inc.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof control is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Pressing the ⬙open⬙ end of the rocker switch once moves
the panel to a comfort stop position short of full opening.
Pressing and holding the switch causes the panel to
continue moving rearward, up to the full-open position.
To close the panel, the ⬙close⬙ end of the switch must be
pressed and held.
Pressing the “vent” button from a fully closed position,
raises the trailing edge of the panel for ventilation. When
the panel is venting, pressing the “close” end or the
rocker switch returns it to the closed position. Both
opening and closing operations in the vent mode occur
only while the switch is held.
NOTE: The sunroof will continue to operate for ten
minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or until the
driver door is opened. This feature may be disabled by
your authorized dealer.
Express Open Feature
During the Express Open operation, any movement of
the switch will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a
partial open position. Again, momentarily pressing the
switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature.
To close the sunroof, hold the switch in the forward
position. Again, any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open
condition until the switch is pushed forward again. To
close fully, hold the switch in the forward position until
the glass movement has stopped.
The sunshade can be opened manually. It will also open
as the sunroof opens. The sunshade cannot be closed if
the sunroof is open.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
3
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury
or death.
WARNING!
In an accident, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
properly secured too.
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow fingers or other body parts, or any
object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury
may result.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
This vehicle has three auxiliary power outlets that can
provide up to 20 Amps of current for accessories de-
signed for use with the standard power outlet adapters.
The outlet located in the lower portion of the instrument
panel has a snap on a plastic cap so that it can be covered
when not in use. As a safety precaution, the outlet in the
instrument panel only operates with the ignition switch
ON. When the optional Cigar Lighter heating element is
used, it heats when pushed in and pops out automati-
cally when ready for use. To preserve the heating
element, do not hold the lighter in the heating position.
There are two additional 12 V/(20 total Amps for both
outlets) power outlets, one located in the storage bin of
the center console and another located in the right rear
cargo area. These outlets can be reconfigured by the
customer to operate only when the ignition is ON
(switched battery fed) or with the ignition ON or OFF
(battery fed) to allow for cellular telephone charging and
or operation while the ignition is off.
NOTE: All accessories connected to these outlets should
be removed or turned OFF when the vehicle is not in use
to protect the battery against discharge (unless the cus-
tomer has reconfigured the fuse block to switched battery
feed).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
3
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine OFF (Battery
Fed Configuration)
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Reconfiguring Power Outlets
To reconfigure the outlets, be sure the ignition is OFF
before removing the fuse. The reconfigurable fuse loca-
tion is a special design that allows the fuse to be installed
in two different ways. If the fuse is located in the ⬙Upper
or Top Position⬙ the outlets will work at all times. If the
fuse is located in the ⬙Lower or Bottom Position⬙ the
power outlets will only work when the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The fuse block is located in the left side kick
panel behind a removable cover near the park brake
pedal. Afuse puller is attached to the inside surface of the
fuse panel cover to aid in removing fuses, if necessary.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
FLOOR CONSOLE
Floor Console Features
The Floor Console between the driver’s and front pas-
senger’s seat, has the following features:
•
Miscellaneous storage compartments
•
Flexible cup holder inserts
•
Portable phone storage bin
•
Portable phone cord routing between lid and base on
forward edge
•
12 Volt battery fed power outlet inside storage com-
partment
•
Side open armrest lid
•
Tissue holder & pen holder
•
Coin slots
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
3
•
Removable CD bin
The coin slots are located under the instrument panel
center stack.
Cup Holders
The Durango has 8 cupholders. Four are located in the
center console, two are located in the second row armrest,
and two are located in the right hand quarter panel for
third row occupants. The four cupholders located in the
center console may be removed for cleaning and are
dishwasher safe.
Power Outlet and Portable Phone Storage
The console is equipped with a power outlet, portable
phone storage bin, and phone cord routing. The phone
storage bin can be used when easy access to the phone is
needed. Also, the power outlet inside the console com-
partment can be used to power up the phone while it is
being stored in the bin. To use, plug in the portable power
recharge cord and place the cord along the opening
under the forward portion of the storage bin. Close the
console armrest lid and plug the power cord into the
phone while resting the phone in the bin. The power
outlet may be used for any portable item with a standard
12 volt power outlet adaptor, requiring up to 20 Amps of
current. The power outlet is on all the time.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
FACTORY INSTALLED ROOF LUGGAGE RACK—
IF EQUIPPED
The load carried on the roof when equipped with a
luggage rack must not exceed 68 kg (150 lbs.), and should
be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
The side rails between the stantions should be used to tie
down cargo. Check the straps frequently to be sure that
the load remains securely attached.
NOTE: Crossbars are offered by Mopar威 accessories.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load
capacity.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
3
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always
distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and
secure the load appropriately.
Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, should be secured to
both the front and rear of the vehicle.
Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is espe-
cially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in
personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof
rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CARGO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM—IF EQUIPPED
The cargo management system consists of a removable
cargo liner and removable cargo organizer.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To operate the cargo organizer dividers, insert finger into
the hole, lift the dividers up and attach netting. To close
the dividers, detach the netting at the top, pull on the
release latch and push the dividers down to the closed
position. To open the side cover, pull on the cover latch.
To open the organizer base pull on the center latch.
Cargo Organizer Closed Cargo Organizer Open
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
3
To remove the organizer from the vehicle, pull the right
hand side of the organizer towards you so that the right
pin slides out of the slot in the vehicle. Push the organizer
to the right and lift out of the vehicle.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
CONTENTS
䡵 Instruments And Controls .................162
䡵 Instrument Cluster ......................163
䡵 Instrument Cluster Description .............164
䡵 Radio Reception Information ...............172
▫ AM Reception .......................172
▫ FM Reception ........................172
䡵 Electronic Digital Clock ..................172
▫ Clock Setting Procedure.................172
䡵 Sales Code REF — AM/FM/CD (Single Disc) Radio
With Optional Hands Free Phone Capability ....173
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode .......174
▫ Operation Instructions - CD Mode .........177
▫ Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone — If
Equipped ...........................179
䡵 Sales Code RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-Disc) Radio With
Optional Satellite Radio, Hands Free Phone, And
Video Capabilities ......................179
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode .......179
4
▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For CD
Audio Play) .........................183
▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For CD Audio
Play) ..............................184
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files .............186
▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3
Audio Play) .........................189
▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . .189
䡵 Satellite Radio — If Equipped ..............191
▫ System Activation .....................191
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID) ....................191
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In REF Radios ......192
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In RAQ Radios .....192
▫ Selecting a Channel ....................193
▫ Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels ......193
▫ Using The PTY (Program Type) Button (If
Equipped) ..........................193
▫ PTY Button ⬙Scan⬙ .....................193
▫ PTY Button ⬙Seek⬙ .....................194
▫ Satellite Antenna ......................194
▫ Reception Quality .....................194
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls — If Equipped . .194
▫ Radio Operation ......................195
▫ CD Player ..........................195
䡵 Compact Disc Maintenance ................196
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones ........197
160 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
䡵 Climate Controls .......................197
▫ Manual Control ......................197
▫ Air Conditioning Operation ..............198
▫ Front Blower Control ...................198
▫ Front Mode Control ...................199
▫ Rear Temperature Control — If Equipped ....201
▫ Rear Window Defrosting And Rear Window
Washer/Wiper .......................202
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped ...........................202
▫ Automatic Control ....................202
▫ Level Of Automatic Control ..............203
▫ Manual Control (ATC) ..................204
▫ Rear Zone Climate Control — If Equipped . . .207
▫ Rear Rotary Temperature Control ..........208
▫ Front Unit To Rear Unit Chart ............209
▫ Operating Tips .......................209
▫ Operating Tips Chart ...................211
䡵 Rear Window Features ...................212
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer .............212
▫ Rear Window Defrosting ................213
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 161
4
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
162 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Instrument Cluster
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 163
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION
1. Fuel Gage
The fuel gauge shows level of fuel in tank when
ignition switch is in the ON position. (See page 260
for more information.)
2. Temperature Gage
The temperature gage indicates engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal
range indicates that the cooling system is operat-
ing satisfactorily. The gage needle in V6 and V8 engines
will likely indicate a high temperature when driving in
hot weather, up mountain grades, in heavy traffic, or
when towing a trailer. If the needle rises to the “H” mark,
stop the vehicle, shift into N (Neutral) increase engine
speed for 2-3 minutes. If the temperature reading does
not return to normal, seek authorized service immedi-
ately.
CAUTION!
Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the
engine running as you would not be able to react to
the temperature indicator if the engine overheats.
The gage pointer will remain near its last reading when
the engine is turned off. It will return to a true reading
when the engine is restarted.
3. Turn Signal Indicators
When a turn signal is activated, a right-pointing or
left-pointing arrow lights up and flashes to indicate the
direction of the turn. These indicators also indicate
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
If either indicator flashes at a faster rate than normal,
check for a defective bulb. If either indicator fails to light
up when the lever is moved, check for a defective fuse or
turn signal LED. A single chime is activated when the
164 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
left/right turn signal is left on with the engine RPM
vehicle speed greater than 15 mph (24 km/h) for more
than one mile. (See page 124 for more information.)
4. Low Fuel Warning Light
This indicator lights when the fuel gauge reads 1/8
of a tank or less.
5. High Beam Indicator
Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
6. Seat Belt Reminder Light
This light comes on for several seconds after the
ignition is turned ON as a reminder to “buckle
up.” This light will remain on as long as the seat
belt remains unbuckled. If this light flashes, it indicates a
fault in the airbag system. Have the system checked by
an authorized dealer. (See page 28 for more information.)
7. Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light shows when the fog lights are ON.
8. Coolant Temperature Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. For a bulb check, this light will come on
momentarily when the ignition is turned On. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle, shift into N
(Neutral) and increase the engine speed for 2 to 3
minutes. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, seek authorized service immediately.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 165
4
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature light is on,
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
in neutral with the air conditioner turned off until
the light turns off. If the if the light remains on, turn
the engine off immediately, and call for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7 of this manual. Follow
the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure
Cap paragraph.
9. Speedometer
Shows the vehicles speed.
10. Voltage Light
This light monitors the electrical system voltage.
The light should turn on momentarily as the
engine is started. If the light stays on or turns on while
driving, it indicates a problem with the charging system.
Immediate service should be obtained.
166 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
11. Liftgate Open
The Gate Open light will illuminate when the liftgate is
not properly closed.
12. Security Light
This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds
when the vehicle theft alarm is arming. The light will
flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set.
The security light will also come on for about three
seconds when the ignition is first turned on.
13. ABS Warning Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
which is described elsewhere in this manual.
This light will come on when the ignition key is
turned to the ON position and may stay on for
approximately 3 seconds. If this light remains on or
comes on during driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. See your authorized dealer immedi-
ately.
14. Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Light
This light indicates that the engine oil pressure has
become too low. For a bulb check, this light will
come on momentarily when the ignition is turned On. If
the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut
off the engine as soon as possible. Immediate service
should be obtained. (See page 311 for more information.)
15. Tachometer
This gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute
(rpm x 1000).
16. Gear Selector
The electronic gear selector display is self-contained
within the instrument cluster. It displays the position of
the automatic transmission shift lever, and the relation of
each position to all other positions. For a good signal the
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 167
4
display will place a box around the selected transmission
range (PRND21). If the PRNDL displays only the char-
acters PRND21 (no boxes) have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
17. Trip Odometer
The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. To
toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer,
press the Odometer/Trip Odometer Button. To reset the
Trip Odometer, press and hold the button while in trip
mode, until the Trip Odometer resets.
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged,
GASCAP will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odom-
eter reset button to turn the GASCAP message off. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
18. Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. There-
fore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
be determined.
19. Traction Control — If Equipped
This display indicator illuminates momentarily
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. The indicator will blink during an
active traction event, but will remain solid
when the system is deactivated or if a system malfunc-
tion occurs.
168 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
The Traction Control indicator will turn ON if:
20. Transmission Temperature Indicator
This light indicates that there is excessive transmission
fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage
such as trailer towing. If this light comes on, stop the
vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster, with the
transmission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off.
21. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control system. If a prob-
lem is detected the light will come on while the
engine is running. If the light remains lit with
the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable,
however, see your dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain
on for 15 seconds as a bulb check. If the light does not
come on during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
22. Door Ajar
The Door Ajar light will illuminate when any door is
open.
NOTE: A chime will sound if the vehicle is rolling and
a door has been opened.
23. BRAKE System Warning Light
This light will light when the ignition key is turned to the
ON position and will remain on for a few seconds. If the
light stays on, it may be an indication that the parking
brake has not been released, or there is a low brake fluid
level. If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on
the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction. In this case, the light will
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 169
4
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the
parking brake is applied, the light will flash when the
gear position is out of park for automatic transmissions.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary. Operating the vehicle in this condition is danger-
ous!
24. Low Washer Fluid Indicator
This light comes on when the washer fluid level falls
below approximately 1/4 full. The light will remain on
until fluid is added and ignition switch is cycled.
25. HeadLights On Indicator
Indicate when your headlights are on.
26. Malfunction Indicator Light
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system
which monitors the emissions and engine control
system. If the vehicle is ready for emissions
testing the light will come on when the ignition is first
turned on and remain on, as a bulb check, until the
engine is started. If the vehicle is not ready for emissions
testing the light will come on when the ignition is first
turned on and remain on for 15 seconds, then blink for 10
seconds, and remain on until the vehicle is started. If the
bulb does not come on during starting, have the condi-
tion investigated promptly.
If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it
suggests a potential engine control problem and the need
for system service.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
170 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability.
If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
27. Airbag Indicator
The indicator lights and remains lit for 6 to 8
seconds when the ignition is first turned ON. If
the light does not come on when the ignition is
first turned on, or the light stays on or comes
on while driving, have the airbag system checked by an
authorized dealer.
28. 4LO Indicator
Indicates when transfer case is in 4LO position.
29. SVC (Service) 4WD Indicator
The SVC 4WD lights will come on when the ignition key
is turned to the ON position and will stay on for 2
seconds. If the light stays on or comes on during driving,
it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly
and that service is required.
30. Cruise Light (Speed Control)
This indicator lights when the electronic speed control
system is turned on.
31. TOW/HAUL
The TOW/HAUL button is located at the end of the gear
shift lever. This light will illuminate when the TOW/
HAUL button has been selected.
32. 4LOCK Indicator
Indicates transfer case is in 4LOCK position.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 171
4
33. Odometer/Trip Odometer Button
Press this button to toggle between the odometer and the
trip odometer display. Holding the button in resets the
trip odometer reading.
RADIO RECEPTION INFORMATION
AM Reception
AM radio signals usually travel longer distances than FM
signals, especially at night. These longer distance AM
signals can cause AM stations to interfere with one
another. Noise from storms and power lines can also
interfere with AM reception. Reducing the treble can
reduce some of the noise.
FM Reception
FM Stereo signals produce better sound quality than AM
signals. However, FM signals will only travel approxi-
mately 10 to 40 miles (16 to 64 km). Tall structures or hills
can cause interference with FM signals causing the sound
to cut out.
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK
The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
the radio. A digital readout shows the frequency and/or
time in hours and minutes (depending on your radio
model) whenever the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“ACC” position.
When the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position, or
when the radio frequency is being displayed, time keep-
ing is accurately maintained.
On the RAQ radio the time button alternates the location
of the time and frequency on the display. On the REF only
one of the two, time or frequency is displayed at a time.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune /
Audio control.
172 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune
/ Audio control to set the minutes.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait approximately
5 seconds.
SALES CODE REF — AM/FM/CD (SINGLE DISC)
RADIO WITH OPTIONAL HANDS FREE PHONE
CAPABILITY
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 173
4
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
The volume can be turned down, but not up, when the
audio system is off and the ignition is ON.
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player or Satellite Radio (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
up and the left side to seek down.The radio will re-
mained tuned to the new station until you make another
selection. Holding the button will bypass stations with-
out stopping until you release it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
radio ON /OFF, or turning ON/OFF the ignition, will
cancel the MUTE feature.
174 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press SCAN a second time.
PSCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the PSCAN button, causes the tuner to scan
through preset stations, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
preset station before continuing to the next. To stop the
search, press PSCAN a second time.
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satel-
lite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control to increase or decrease
the frequency.
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 175
4
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BALwill
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak-
ers.
Press the tune control again or wait 5 seconds and the
radio will return to normal display.
SET Button (Radio Mode) To SET The Push-Button
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
the station will continue to play but will not be stored
into push-button memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM,12 FM and
12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into push-
button memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can
be selected by pressing the push-button twice.
Every time a preset button is used a corresponding
button number will be displayed.
176 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Preset Buttons1-6(Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
Operation Instructions - CD Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Inserting The Compact Disc (Single CD Player)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display.
If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch to CD
mode and begin to play. The display will show the track
number and play time in minutes and seconds. Play will
begin at the start of track one.
NOTE:
•
You may insert or eject a disc with the radio or ignition
switch OFF.
•
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
Player and the display will show the time of day.
SEEK Button (CD Mode)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track
on the CD. Press the left side of the button to return to the
beginning of the current track, or return to the beginning
of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10
seconds of the current selection.
MUTE Button ((CD Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control or turning OFF
the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 177
4
SCAN Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
EJECT Button (CD Mode)
Press this button and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. The
unit will switch to the last selected mode.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
TIME Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD
playing time to time of day.
RW/FF (CD Mode)
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player
will begin to fast forward until FF is released. The RW
(Reverse) button works in a similar manner.
NOTE: RND Button (Random Play Button) (CD Mode)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press the RDN button a second time to stop Random
Play.
178 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone — If
Equipped
Refer to the HANDS FREE PHONE (UConnect™) section
of the Owner’s Manual.
SALES CODE RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-DISC) RADIO
WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO, HANDS
FREE PHONE, AND VIDEO CAPABILITIES
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
The volume can be turned down, but not up, when the
audio system is off and the ignition is ON.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 179
4
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
Radio, CD player, Hands Free Phone, Satellite, or Vehicle
Entertainment System (VES) (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if equipped) mode.
Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left
side to seek down.The radio will remained tuned to the
new station until you make another selection. Holding
the button and will bypass stations without stopping
until you release it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control or turning OFF
the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers
NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. Pressing
the AM/FM button continues the search in the alternate
frequency band. To stop the search, press SCAN a second
time.
INFO Button (Radio Mode)
Press the INFO button for an RBDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
180 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satel-
lite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control to increase or decrease
the frequency.
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BALwill
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak-
ers.
Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone,
balance and fade.
RDN/PTY Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 181
4
within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to
be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broad-
cast PTY information.
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format
types:
Program Type
16 Digit-Character Dis-
play
No program type or un-
defined
None
News News
Information Information
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Rock Rock
Classic Rock Classic_Rock
Adult Hits Adult_Hits
Soft Rock Soft_Rock
Top 40 Top_40
Country Country
Oldies Oldies
Soft Soft
Nostalgia Nostalgia
Jazz Jazz
Classical Classical
Rhythm and Blues Rhythm_and_Blues
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft_R_&_B
Foreign Language Foreign_Language
Religious Music Religious_Music
Religious Talk Religious_Talk
Personality Personality
Public Public
College College
Unassigned
Weather Weather
182 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
Buttons1-6(Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
Operation Instructions - (CD MODE For CD Audio
Play)
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: Note: This Radio is capable of playing compact
discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable
compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks
and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the display will show the time of day. If you insert
a disc with the ignition OFF, the display will show the
time of day for about 5 seconds, then go out.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 183
4
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
SEEK Button (CD MODE For CD Audio Play)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next
selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to
return to the beginning of the current selection, or return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is
within the first 10 seconds of the current selection.
MUTE Button (CD MODE For CD Audio Play)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control or turning OFF
the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers.
SCAN Button (CD MODE For CD Audio Play)
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode For CD Audio
Play)
LOAD/ EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙LOAD DISC⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading.
184 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
LOAD / EJECT - Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the LOAD/ EJECT button to eject all discs
in the radio.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD. If the CD is removed and
there are no other CD’s in the radio, the radio will remain
in CD mode and display ⬙NO DISC LOADED⬙. The disc
can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
TIME Button (CD MODE For CD Audio Play)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display and small clock time display to a
large clock time display and small CD playing time
display.
RW/FF (CD MODE For CD Audio Play)
Press FF (Fast Forward) once and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is pressed again or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
TUNE Control (CD MODE For CD Audio Play)
Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone,
Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode.
AM/FM Button (CD MODE For CD Audio Play)
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 185
4
RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD
MODE For CD Audio Play)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press the RDN button a second time to stop Random
Play.
BUTTONS1-6(CDMODEForCDAudio Play)
Selects disc positions1-6forPlay/Load/Eject.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported media (disc types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.
Supported medium formats (file systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 15
186 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders: 100
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 file formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 187
4
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
188 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3 Audio
Play)
SEEK Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next
MP3 File. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays
the beginning of the MP3 file. Pressing the button within
the first ten seconds plays the previous file.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
LOAD/ EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙LOAD DISC⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading.
LOAD / EJECT - Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the LOAD/ EJECT button to eject all discs
in the radio.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD. If the CD is removed and
there are no other CD’s in the radio, the radio will remain
in CD mode and display ⬙NO DISC LOADED.⬙
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 189
4
INFO Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Press and INFO button while playing MP3 disc. The
radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if avail-
able).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button while in the message
display priority mode or elapsed time display priority
mode will display the song title for each file.
RW/FF (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the MP3 selection.
TUNE Control (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of
Tone, Balance, and Fade.
AM/FM Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Switches back to Radio mode.
RND/ PTY Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
SET/DIR Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Press the SET/DIR Button to display folders, when
playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure.
Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or
move through available folders. Press the TUNE control
to select a folder.
Buttons1-6(CDModeForMP3Play)
Selects disc positions1-6forPlay/Load/Eject.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to Hands Free Phone section of the Owner’s
Manual.
190 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES威) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VES威)
Guide.
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satel-
lite Radio. This service offers up to 100 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
System Activation
To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site
at www.sirius.com. Please have the following informa-
tion available when activating your system:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Credit card information.
3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Num-
ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
steps:
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 191
4
ESN/SID Access With REF Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the Eject or CD Eject (depending on
the radio type) and Time buttons simultaneously for 3
seconds. The first four digits of the twelve-digit ESN/SID
number will be displayed. Press the SEEK UP button to
display the next four digits. Continue to press the SEEK
UP button until all twelve ESN/SID digits have been
displayed. The SEEK DOWN will page down until the
first four digits are displayed. The radio will exit the
ESN/SID mode when any other button is pushed, the
ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any
button was pushed.
ESN/SID Access With RAQ Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID num-
bers will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/SID
mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is
turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button
was pushed.
Selecting Satellite Mode in REF Radios
Press the MODE button repeatedly until ⬙SA⬙ appears in
the display. A CD may remain in the radio while in the
Satellite radio mode.
Selecting Satellite Mode in RAQ Radios
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word
⬙SIRIUS⬙ appears in the display. These radios will also
display the following:
•
After 3 seconds, the current channel name and channel
number will be displayed for 5 seconds.
•
The current program type and channel number will
then be displayed for 5 seconds.
•
The current channel number will then be displayed
until an action occurs.
192 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Selecting a Channel
Press and release the SEEK or TUNE buttons to search for
the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up
and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the
TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until
the button is released.
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before
moving on to the next channel. The word ⬙SCAN⬙ will
appear in the display between each channel change. Press
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content
can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-539-
7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblock-
ing. Please have your ESN/SID information available.
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels
In addition to the 10 AM and 10 FM pre-set stations, you
may also commit 10 satellite stations to push button
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (if
equipped)
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your
radio.
PTY Button ⴖSCANⴖ
When the desired program type is obtained, press the
⬙SCAN⬙ button within five seconds. The radio will play 7
seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next
channel of the selected program type. Press the ⬙SCAN⬙
button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Pressing the ⬙SEEK⬙ or ⬙SCAN⬙ button while
performing a music type scan will change the channel by
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 193
4
one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
button during a music type scan, will call up the memory
channel and stop the search.
PTY Button ⴖSEEKⴖ
When the desired program is obtained, press the ⬙SEEK⬙
button within five seconds. The channel will change to
the next channel that matches the program type selected.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception on vehicles available with
a luggage rack, do not place items on the roof around the
rooftop antenna location. Metal objects placed within the
line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased perfor-
mance. Larger luggage items should be placed as far
forward as possible. Do not place items directly on or
above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
194 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. Pressing the top of the switch will
increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
The button located in the center of the right hand control
will switch modes to Radio or CD.
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left hand control
is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand control
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set push-buttons.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 195
4
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch changes
CD’s on the 6–Disc in-dash CD changer radio. This
button does not function for all other radios.
COMPACT DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the compact discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e. scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have theft protection encoding. Try a
known good disc before considering disc player service.
196 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being On in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Control
The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. The
following describes its operation:
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 197
4
Air Conditioning Operation
To turn the air conditioning On or Off perform the
following steps:
•
Position the mode control button to the desired airflow
setting.
•
Set the front blower control to any desired speed.
•
Press the Snowflake (A/C) button which is located to
the right of the temperature control slide. An indicator
light on the Snowflake (A/C) button shows that the air
conditioning is On.
•
Press the Snowflake (A/C) button a second time to
turn the air conditioning Off.
NOTE: The compressor will not engage until the engine
has been running for several seconds. Slight changes in
engine speed or power may be noticed when the com-
pressor is on. This is a normal occurrence since the
compressor will cycle on and off to maintain comfort and
improve fuel economy.
Front Blower Control
The Front Blower controls the
amount of air delivered to the
passenger compartment.
There are four blower speeds.
The fan speed increases as
you move the control clock-
wise. When the front blower
control is turned to OFF, the
blower will be turned off and
the system will be positioned
in recirculation mode.
198 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Front Mode Control
The mode control allows you to
choose from several patterns of air
distribution.
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between
the major modes. These intermediate positions are iden-
tified by the small dots and give an even blend of both
modes.
Recirculation Mode (Panel or Bi-Level)
Select either the Panel or Bi-Level
mode positions when the outside air
contains smoke, odors, high humidity,
or if rapid cooling of the interior is
desired. This feature allows for recir-
culation of interior air only. Air flows
through the panel outlets or panel and
floor outlets in these modes.
Panel
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to
direct the airflow.
Bi-Level
Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-
ment panel and those located on the floor.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 199
4
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Heat (Floor)
Outside air flows primarily through the floor out-
lets located under the instrument panel. A small
amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix
Outside air flows in equal proportions through the
floor and defroster outlet.
Defrost
Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield
through the defroster outlet located at the base of
the windshield and side window demist outlets.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes, even if
the A/C button has not been pressed. This dehumidifies
the air to help dry the windshield.
Temperature Control
The temperature of the air is controlled by a slide located
on the top center of the control panel. Move the slide left
or right to change the temperature. The blue area of the
scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area
indicates warmer temperatures.
200 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Rear Temperature Control — If Equipped
Rotating this knob left to the
“REAR CONTROL” position
allows the passengers in the
second and third row seats to
control the blower speed and
temperature by means of the
rear control located in the rear
of the center floor console as
described under “Rear Zone
Control.” Rotating this knob
to the “OFF” position, turns off the rear climate controls.
Rotating this knob to the right of the “OFF” position
allows the Driver and front passenger to control the rear
blower speed, and the rear temperature using the front
temperature slide. The mode, front or rear, is always
controlled by the front mode control. For example: Panel
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 201
4
mode on the front control will give you air from the
outlets in the headliner in the rear. Floor mode in the
front will give you floor in the rear.
Rear Window Defrosting and Rear Window
Washer/Wiper
See the “Rear Window Features” section of this book.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The control can be turned on by pressing the POWER
button. When the control is turned on, it will be in the last
mode prior to being turned off. Pressing the POWER
button again will turn off the control. The control can also
be turned on by pressing any button and it will display
the corresponding operating mode for that button.
Automatic Control
The ATC system can maintain a steady comfort level in
various weather conditions with a simple operation:
•
Select your desired temperature setting by pressing
the + or – side of the TEMP rocker switch.
202 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
The ATC system uses an infrared sensor located in the
overhead console to measure the temperature of the
driver. Based on the sensor input, the system will auto-
matically control comfort by varying the temperature, fan
speed, and mode. This maintains a comfortable tempera-
ture, even under changing conditions. It is important that
the infrared sensor is kept clean and that objects are not
blocking the sensor. It is also important that objects are
not used that may scratch or damage it in any way.
Level Of Automatic Control
72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum
comfort for the average person, however, this may vary.
NOTE: The temperature setting can be adjusted at any
time without affecting automatic control operation. It is
not necessary to move the temperature setting for cold or
hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the tem-
perature, mode and fan speed to provide comfort as
quickly as possible.
NOTE: In cold weather, the fan will not turn on in
AUTO mode until the engine coolant has warmed up
sufficiently. This is indicated by the WARM UP DELAY
message on the display.
NOTE: The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or
Metric by selecting the US/M customer programmable
feature. Refer to the ⬙Overhead Console-Customer Pro-
grammable Features.⬙ The mode will also be shown in the
display and will change as required during automatic
operation.
NOTE: The system can be put into recirculate mode
without affecting ATC operation. This will prevent out-
side air from entering the vehicle. Use this mode to
temporarily block out any outside odors, smoke, or dust.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 203
4
Manual Control (ATC)
You also may choose to customize your comfort by
selecting the fan speed and mode manually. Pressing the
fan speed button or any mode button places the system
into manual operation.
While in manual operation there are six fan speeds
available and the choice of any mode. The airflow
temperature is adjusted automatically to maintain the
desired comfort level. You can adjust the temperature by
pressing the + or – TEMP rocker switch.
FAN Control
Use this button to regulate the amount of air deliv-
ered through the system in any mode you select.
Press the + or – side of the button to increase or decrease
fan speed.
Air Conditioning Operation
Press this button to turn on the air conditioning
compressor. A snow flake symbol in the display
shows that the compressor is on. Compressor operation is
automatic when you press the AUTO button and no
snowflake is shown.
The compressor can operate at any temperature above
32°F (0°C).
NOTE: The compressor will not engage until the engine
has been running for several seconds. Slight changes in
engine speed or power may be noticed when the com-
pressor is on. This is a normal occurrence since the
compressor will cycle on and off to maintain comfort and
improve fuel economy.
Recirculate Button
Press this button to recirculate the air inside the
vehicle. Outside air is prevented from entering
the vehicle. Use this mode to temporarily block
out any outside odors, smoke, dust or when
rapid cooling of the interior is required.
204 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Manual control of Recirculation is possible only in Panel,
Floor, and Bi-Level modes. It will not operate in Mix, or
Defrost modes. The recirculation symbol will flash three
times indicating recirculation is not available in these
modes.
NOTE: If the interior of the windows begin to fog, press
the recirculate button to return to outside air. Some
conditions will cause captured interior air to fog win-
dows when in recirculate mode.
Panel
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to
direct the airflow.
Floor (Heat)
Outside air flows primarily through the floor out-
lets located under the instrument panel. A small
amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix
Outside air flows in equal proportions through the
floor and defroster outlets.
Bi-Level
Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-
ment panel and those located on the floor.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Defrost
Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield
through the defroster outlets located at the base of
the windshield and side window demist outlets.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes, even if
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 205
4
the A/C snowflake button has not been pressed. This
dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield.
Rear Temperature Control (ATC)
The “REAR FUNCTIONS” button cycles through the
following modes:
Rear Control from Front
This allows the driver or passenger to control the rear
blower speeds using the FAN +/– rocker switch and the
rear temperature using the TEMP +/– rocker switch.
While in this mode, pressing the POWER button will turn
the rear system off. Pressing the POWER, TEMP or FAN
buttons will turn the rear system back on.
NOTE: The display will show a “REAR” fan speed
graph and a “REAR” temperature graph.
CONTROL IN REAR
This allows the passengers in the second row seats to
control the blower speed and temperature by means of
the rear control located in the rear of the center floor
console as described under the ⬙Rear Zone Climate
Control.⬙
NOTE: The display will show “CONTROL IN REAR.”
REAR OFF
This turns the rear system off. The control will return to
the front system display after approximately 5 seconds if
no buttons are pushed while in one of the rear system
displays. You may also return to the front system display
sooner by pushing any button except the POWER, REAR,
TEMP or FAN buttons.
NOTE: The display will show “REAR OFF.”
Rear Window Defrosting and Rear Window
Washer/Wiper
See the “Rear Window Features” section of this book.
206 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Rear Zone Climate Control — If Equipped
Headliner air comes from the outlets in the headliner.
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vane knobs on the
outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
The rear compartment control uses two rotary knobs: one
for the temperature control and the other for the fan
speed control. The mode for the rear air conditioning and
heating system is always controlled by the front control
unit. Fan and temperature can be controlled from the
front control unit or the rear control unit.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 207
4
Rear Rotary Blower Control
The second row seat occupants have control of the rear
blower speed, only when the front control unit is in the
“REAR CONTROL” position.
The rear blower switch has an “Off” position and a range
of blower speeds. Rotating the rear blower control clock-
wise will increase the blower speed.
Rear Rotary Temperature Control
The second row seat occupants have control of the rear
temperature control, only when the front control unit is
in the “REAR CONTROL” position.
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature control knob to the right or left.
The blue area indicates cooler temperatures while the red
area indicates warmer temperatures.
NOTE: For best operation, make sure that ventilation
grilles located in the rear storage area are not obstructed
by stowed articles.
208 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Front Unit to Rear Unit Chart
If the Front Control is
selected
Rear Airflow will come
from
Panel Headliner
Bi-Level Headliner
• Between Bi-Level Floor Bi-Level
Floor Floor
Mix Floor
Defrost Floor
Operating Tips
Fast Cooldown
For a fast cooldown, set the blower fan to the highest
setting, set the mode control to the panel fresh position,
press the snowflake button to turn on the air condition-
ing, and drive with the windows open for the first few
minutes. Once the hot air has been expelled, close the
windows and set the mode selector to the Recirculation
panel or Recirculation Bi-level position. When a comfort-
able condition has been reached, choose a mode position
and adjust the temperature control and blower speed as
necessary to maintain comfort. For high humidity condi-
tions it may be necessary to remain in the Recirculation
mode to maintain comfort.
Window Fogging
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases
turning on the Air-conditioning (pressing the snowflake
button) will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control,
air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort.
As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to
direct air onto the windshield by using MIX Mode
position on the control. Adjust the temperature control
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 209
4
and blower speed to maintain comfort. Interior fogging
on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting
the defrost mode.
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.
Summer Operation
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high
quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide
proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point
of the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50 %
concentration is recommended.
When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic
in hot weather especially when towing a trailer, addi-
tional engine cooling may be required. If this situation is
encountered, operate the transmission in a lower gear.
When stopped in heavy traffic, it may be necessary to
shift into NEUTRAL and press the accelerator slightly for
fast idle operation.
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstruc-
tions.
210 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Operating Tips Chart
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 211
4
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
A rotating switch located on the climate control
panel turns the rear wiper On or Off. Pressing the
rotating switch inward activates the rear window
washer. Rotating the switch will enable one of five
intermittent delay times for the rear wiper. The delay
times range from 20 to 1 second.
212 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
off, the wiper will automatically return to the “Park”
position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wiper will
resume operation.
Rear Window Defrosting
Apush-button type switch is located in the climate
control panel. Press the switch and the rear win-
dow defroster and electric remote control heated mirrors
(if equipped) will turn On. An amber indicator on the
push-button will light when the defroster is turned On.
An symbol will be displayed when the defroster is turned
on with an ATC control. Push again to turn Off prior to
time-out. The defroster will automatically turn Off after
fifteen minutes. For ten more minutes of operation, push
the button again. To prevent excessive battery drain, use
the defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow to prevent damage to heating elements. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Also, keep all
objects a safe distance from the window to prevent
damaging the heating elements.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 213
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures .....................218
▫ Automatic Transmission ................218
▫ Normal Starting ......................219
▫ Engine Block Heater — If Equipped ........220
䡵 Automatic Transmission ..................221
▫ Automatic Transmission ................221
䡵 Four-Wheel Drive Operation ...............226
▫ NV 144 Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions ................226
▫ Shifting Procedure - NV 144 Transfer Case . . .228
▫ NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case Operating
Information / Precautions ...............229
▫ Shifting Procedure - NV 244 Generation II
Transfer Case ........................233
䡵 Parking Brake .........................234
䡵 Brake System ..........................236
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . .236
䡵 Power Steering ........................238
䡵 Rocking The Vehicle .....................239
5
䡵 Tire Safety Information ...................239
▫ Tire Markings ........................239
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) ..........243
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........244
䡵 Tires—General Information ................248
▫ Tire Pressure .........................248
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................249
▫ Radial-Ply Tires ......................252
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped .........252
▫ Limited Use Spare — If Equipped .........253
▫ Tire Spinning ........................254
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................254
▫ Replacement Tires .....................255
▫ Alignment And Balance .................256
䡵 Supplemental Tire Pressure Information .......257
䡵 Tire Chains ...........................257
䡵 Snow Tires ...........................258
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations ............259
䡵 Fuel Requirements ......................260
▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................261
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............261
▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................262
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................262
▫ Adding Fuel .........................262
▫ Fuel System Cautions ..................265
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ..............266
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 Catalytic Converter .....................266
䡵 Vehicle Loading ........................268
▫ Certification Label .....................268
▫ Curb Weight .........................269
▫ Loading ............................269
䡵 Trailer Towing .........................271
▫ Definitions ..........................271
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ..............274
▫ Gross Combined Vehicle Weight Rating
(GCWR) ............................275
▫ Trailer Towing—Hitches ................275
▫ Trailer Towing Information (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ......................275
▫ Trailer Towing Requirements .............276
▫ Trailer Tow Wiring ....................277
▫ Cooling System Tips—Trailer Towing .......278
䡵 Snowplow ............................279
▫ Dodge Durango Models ................279
䡵 Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . .280
▫ Recreational Towing 2WD Models .........280
▫ Recreational Towing 4WD Models .........280
䡵 Traction .............................284
䡵 Equipment Identification Plate .............284
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
5
STARTING PROCEDURES
The starter should not be operated for more than 15-
second intervals. Waiting a few seconds between such
intervals will protect the starter from overheating.
Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the selector lever in NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This
type of start can be dangerous if done improperly.
See section 6 of this manual for the proper jump
starting procedures and follow them carefully.
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
Normal Starting
Normal Starting of either a warm or cold engine is
obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator
pedal. Turn the key to the START position and release
when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within
10 seconds, turn the key to the OFF position, wait 5
seconds, then repeat the starting procedure.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
Normal Starting procedure, it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there
while cranking the engine. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accel-
erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the Normal Starting procedure should
be repeated.
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
5
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
After Starting
The idle speed is automatically controlled on fuel injected
engines and will decrease as the engine warms up.
CAUTION!
Long periods of engine idling can cause excessive
exhaust temperatures which can damage your ve-
hicle. Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the
engine running.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may
cause serious injury or death.
Engine Block Heater — If Equipped
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three wire extension cord.
The 3.7L/4.7L engine block heater cord is located at the
front of the engine compartment near the radiator cap.
The 5.7L engine block heater cord is located on the left
side of the engine compartment and rearward of the
power distribution center.
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord could
cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Automatic Transmission
The electronic PRNDLon the instrument cluster indicates
the transmission gear selected. The selector lever is
mounted on the right side of the steering column. To
drive, move the selector lever from Park or Neutral to the
desired drive position. Pull selector lever toward you
when shifting into Reverse, Second, First or Park, or
when shifting out of Park.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out
of Park and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
pressed. This system is active only while the ignition
switch is in the ON position. Always depress the brake
pedal first, before moving the gear selector out of PARK.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from Park or
Neutral position into another gear range.
“P” Park
Supplements parking brake by locking the transmission.
Engine can be started in this range. Never use Park while
vehicle is in motion. Apply parking brake when leaving
vehicle in this range. Always apply parking brake first,
then place selector in Park position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
5
WARNING!
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not completely in P (Park). Check by trying to
move the gearshift lever back and forth without first
pulling the lever toward you, after you have set it in
P (Park). Make sure it is in Park before leaving the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use Park position on an automatic transmis-
sion as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
“R” Reverse
Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
“N” Neutral
Shift to Neutral when vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with engine running. Engine may be started in
this range. Set the parking brake if you must leave the
vehicle.
NOTE: Towing the vehicle (except as specified under
Towing A Disabled Vehicle), coasting, or otherwise driv-
ing the vehicle while in N (Neutral) can cause severe
transmission damage
“D” Drive
For most city and highway driving.
“2” Second
For driving slowly in heavy city traffic or on mountain
roads where more precise speed control is desirable. Use
it also when climbing long grades, and for engine brak-
ing when descending moderately steep grades. To pre-
vent excessive engine speed do not exceed 45 miles per
hour (72 km/h) in this range.
“1” First
For driving up very steep hills and for engine braking at
low speeds 25 mph (40 km/h) or less when going down
hill. To prevent excessive engine speed do not exceed 25
mph (40 km/h) in this range.
Overdrive Operation
The overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec-
tronically controlled fourth and fifth (if equipped) speed
(Overdrive). The transmission will automatically shift
from Drive to Overdrive if the following conditions are
present:
•
the transmission selector is in Drive;
•
the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem-
perature;
•
vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (48
km/h);
•
the “TOW/HAUL” switch has not been activated;
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
5
•
transmission has reached normal operating tempera-
ture.
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem-
peratures, the transmission may not shift into Overdrive
and will automatically select the most desirable gear for
operation at this temperature. Normal operation will
resume when the transmission fluid temperature has
risen to a suitable level. Refer also to the Note under
torque converter clutch, later in this section.
If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the
transmission will automatically select the most desirable
gear for operation at this temperature. If the transmission
temperature becomes hot enough the TRANS TEMP light
may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out
of Overdrive until the transmission cools down. After
cooldown, the transmission will resume normal opera-
tion.
The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to Drive
if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at vehicle
speeds above approximately 35 mph (56 km/h).
When To Use “TOW/HAUL” Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-
curs, press the “TOW/HAUL” button. This will improve
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
performance and reduce the potential for transmission
overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When
operating in “TOW/HAUL” mode, 5th gear (if
equipped) is disabled and 2-3 and 3-4 shift patterns are
modified. Shifts into Overdrive (4th gear) are allowed
during steady cruise (for improved fuel economy) and
automatic closed-throttle downshifts to 3rd gear (for
improved braking) will occur during steady braking.
The “TOW/HAUL” light will illuminate in the instru-
ment cluster to indicate when the switch has been
activated. Pressing the switch a second time restores
normal operation. If the “TOW/HAUL” mode is desired,
the button must be pressed each time the engine is
started.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy is included
in all automatic transmissions. A clutch within the torque
converter engages automatically at a calibrated speed at
light throttle. It engages at higher speeds under heavier
acceleration. This may result in a slightly different feeling
or response during normal operation in high gear. When
the vehicle speed drops below a calibrated speed, or
during acceleration, the clutch automatically and
smoothly disengages. The feature is operational in Over-
drive and in Drive.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
[usually after 1-3 miles (1.6 - 4.8 km) of driving]. Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal.
Pressing the⬙TOW/HAUL⬙ button will demonstrate that
the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
NOTE: If the vehicle has not been driven in several
days, the first few seconds of operation after shifting the
transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
5
the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter
will refill within five seconds of shifting from Park into
any other gear position.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
NV 144 Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions
The NV 144 is an electric shift transfer case and is
operated by the Four-Wheel-Drive (4WD) Control
Switch, which is located on the instrument panel.
The NV 144 transfer case provides 2 mode positions:
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) and 4-Wheel-Drive LOCK.
The NV 144 transfer case is designed to be driven in for
AWD for normal street and highway conditions (all road
surfaces roads).
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
4LOCK position can be used to lock the front and rear
driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels
to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by
rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the 4LOCK position
- see Shifting Procedure section for specific shifting
instructions. The 4LOCK position is designed for loose,
slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4LOCK posi-
tion on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire
wear and damage to the driveline components.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
Transfer case position indicator lights are located on the
instrument cluster, and indicate the current and desired
transfer case selection. If there are no indicator lights on
or flashing the transfer case position is All-Wheel Drive
(AWD).
The “SVC 4WD” warning light monitors the electric shift
4WD system. If this light remains on after engine start up
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
or illuminates during driving, it means that the 4WD
system is not functioning properly and that service is
required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the ⴖService 4WDⴖ light is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
injury.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. The NV 144 transfer
case is not equipped with a synchronizer and therefore
the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the
shift to take place. Shifting while only the front or rear
wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer
case.
Proper operation of four-wheel-drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
Because four-wheel-drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position see the information below:
AWD
Normal All-Wheel-Drive High Range - Employs inter-
axle differential. Allows front and rear wheels to rotate at
different speeds. All road surfaces.
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
5
4LOCK
Four-Wheel-Drive LOCK - Locks the front and rear
driveshafts together. Forces the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose,
slippery road surfaces only.
Shifting Procedure - NV 144 Transfer Case
AWD to 4LOCK or 4LOCK to AWD
With the key ON and the engine either OFF or RUN-
NING, rotate the transfer case switch, located on the
instrument panel to the desired position.
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Delayed shifting out of 4LOCK may be experi-
enced due to uneven tire wear, low tire pressure, or
excessive vehicle loading.
NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case
will not shift.The indicator light will flash and the current
transfer case position will be maintained.To retry a
selection, turn the control knob back to the current
position, wait five (5) seconds, and retry the shift.
NOTE: The 4x4 system will not allow shifts between
AWD/4LOCK if the rear wheels are spinning (no trac-
tion). In this situation the position indicator light will
continue to flash. At this time, reduce speed and stop
spinning the wheels to complete the shift. There may be
a delay up to 13 seconds for the shift to complete after the
wheels have stopped spinning.
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case Operating
Information / Precautions
The NV 244 Generation II is an electric shift transfer case
and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch, which is
located on the instrument panel.
The NV 244 Generation II transfer case provides 4 mode
positions - Normal all-wheel-drive high range, four-
wheel-drive LOCK, four-wheel-drive low range, and
neutral.
This transfer case is equipped with an inter-axle differ-
ential that allows driving the vehicle in the normal
all-wheel-drive position (AWD) at all times on any given
road surface, including dry hard surfaced roads. The
AWD mode allows the front and rear wheels to rotate at
different speeds. This eliminates driveline binding and
component wear normally associated with driving the
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
5
vehicle in the 4LOCK position on dry hard surfaced
roads. This feature provides the safety, security, and
convenience of operating in all-wheel drive at all times
regardless of road conditions.
When additional traction is required, the 4LOCK and
4LO positions can be used to lock the front and rear
driveshafts together through the transfer case inter-axle
differential and force the front and rear wheels to rotate
at the same speed. This is accomplished by rotating the
4WD Control Switch to these positions. The 4LOCK and
4LO positions are intended for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Driving in the 4LOCK and 4LO positions
on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear
and damage to the driveline components.
The transfer case Neutral (N) position is selected by
depressing the recessed button located on the lower left
hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch.
NOTE: The transfer case Neutral (N) position is to be
used for recreational towing only. See Recreational Tow-
ing section for specific procedures on shifting into and
out of Neutral (N).
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
Transfer case position indicator lights are located on the
instrument cluster. If there are no indicator lights on or
flashing the transfer case position is All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) and indicate the current and desired transfer case
selection (4HI ⇔ 4LOCK).
The “SVC 4WD” warning light monitors the electric shift
4WD system. If this light remains on after engine start up
or illuminates during driving, it means that the 4WD
system is not functioning properly and that service is
required.
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the ⴖService 4WDⴖ light is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
injury.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. The NV 244 Generation
II transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and
therefore the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be
equal for the shift to take place. Shifting while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the
transfer case.
When operating your vehicle in 4LO, the engine speed is
approximately three times that of the AWD or 4LOCK
positions at a given road speed. Take care not to over-
speed the engine and do not exceed 40 km/h (25 mph).
Proper operation of four-wheel-drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
5
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position see the information below:
AWD
Normal All-Wheel-Drive High Range - Employs inter-
axle differential. Allows front and rear wheels to rotate at
different speeds. All road surfaces.
4LOCK
Four-Wheel-Drive LOCK - Locks the transfer case inter-
axle differential. Forces front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. Additional traction for loose, slippery
road surfaces only.
4LO
Four-Wheel-Drive Low Range - Low speed 4 wheel
drive. Locks the transfer case inter-axle differential.
Forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. Additional traction and maximum pulling power
for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25
mph (40 km/h).
N
Neutral - Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle. See Recreational Towing for more infor-
mation.
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Procedure - NV 244 Generation II
Transfer Case
NOTE: The 4x4 system will not allow shifts between
AWD/ 4LOCK if the rear wheels are spinning (no
traction). In this situation a position indicator light will
flash and the original position indicator light will remain
ON. At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the
wheels to complete the shift. There may be a delay up to
13 seconds for the shift to complete after the wheels have
stopped spinning.
NOTE: Delayed shifting out of the 4LOCK position may
be experienced due to uneven tire wear, low tire pressure,
or excessive loading.
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4LO some gear
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3
mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. USE EITHER
OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine RUNNING, slow vehicle to 2 to 3
mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
5
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control
switch to the desired position.
4. After the position indicator light has stopped flashing,
shift the transmission back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the key ON and the engine either OFF or
RUNNING, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
position.
4. After the position indicator light has stopped flashing,
shift the transmission back into gear.
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case
will not shift. The indicator light will flash and the
current transfer case position will be maintained. To retry
the selection, turn the control knob back to the current
position, wait five (5) seconds, and retry the shift.
PARKING BRAKE
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and
the gear-shift lever is in PARK position. When parking on
a hill you should apply the Parking Brake before placing
the gear shift lever in PARK; otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the selector out of PARK.
NOTE: The instrument cluster brake warning light
indicates only that the parking brake is applied. You must
be sure the parking brake is fully applied before leaving
the vehicle.
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
The parking brake should be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
5
WARNING!
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or vehicle may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also be certain to leave an
automatic transmission in Park. Failure to do so
may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving, failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
•
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dan-
gerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be injured. Children should be warned not
to touch the parking brake or the gear selector
lever. Don’t leave the key in the ignition. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In the event power assist is lost for any reason, (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
off), the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be significantly increased over that
required with the power system operating.
If either the front or rear hydraulic systems lose normal
capability, the remaining system will still function with
some loss of braking effectiveness. This will be evident by
increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal
force required to slow or stop, and activation of the Brake
Warning Lamp and the ABS Lamp during brake use.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This Anti-Lock Brake System is designed to aid the driver
in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking
conditions. The system operates with a separate com-
puter to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel
lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
The Anti-Lock Brake system includes an amber (ABS)
warning light. When the light is illuminated, the Anti-
Lock Brake system is not functioning. The system reverts
to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning the ignition Off
and On again may reset theAnti-Lock Brake system if the
fault detected was only momentary.
WARNING!
Anti-Lock Brake Systems contain sophisticated elec-
tronic equipment. It may be susceptible to interfer-
ence caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference can
cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability.
Installation of such equipment should be done by
qualified professionals.
WARNING!
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
5
WARNING!
•
Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natu-
ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase braking or steering efficiency be-
yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
•
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
When you are in a severe braking condition involving
use of the Anti-lock Brake system, you will experience
some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop. This is
the result of the system reverting to the base brake
system.
Engagement of the Anti-lock Brake System may be
accompanied by a pulsing sensation. You may also hear a
clicking noise. These occurrences are normal, and indi-
cate that the system is functioning properly.
POWER STEERING
Your power steering system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for any reason the hydraulic pressure is interrupted, it
will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these
conditions you will experience an increase in steering
effort and a noticeable amount of “free play” in the
steering wheel.
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
ROCKING THE VEHICLE
If vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can
often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the gear
selector rhythmically between FIRST and REVERSE,
while applying slight pressure to the accelerator.
The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to main-
tain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or
racing the engine is most effective. Allow the engine to
idle with the transmission selector in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles.
This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of
transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a
stuck vehicle.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•
P(Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: P215/65R15 95H.
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
5
•
European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H
•
LT(Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Milimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—⬙R⬙ means Radial Construction.
—⬙D⬙ means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
5
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un-
der specified operating conditions. (ie. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions and
posted speed limits).
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire.
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire
however the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side
of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location.(2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size.(2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer.(1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
5
EXAMPLE:
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure for pas-
senger cars is listed on either the face of the driver’s door
or the driver’s side “B” pillar. For vehicles other than
passenger cars, the cold tire inflation pressures are listed
on either the shutface of the driver’s door, the “B” pillar,
the Certification Label or in the Tire Inflation Pressures
brochure in the glove compartment.
Tire Placard Location
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and the Vehicle Loading section of
this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWR’s, vehicle loading and trailer towing, see the
Vehicle Loading section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
Tire and Loading Information
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
5
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. This table is for illustra-
tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392
Kg).
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
5
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES—GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
1. Safety—
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
•
Under inflation increases tire flexing and can
result in tire failure.
•
Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause
damage that results in tire failure.
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
•
Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Underinflation also increases tire
rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure for passenger cars
is listed on either the face of the driver’s door or the
driver’s side “B” pillar. For vehicles other than passenger
cars, the cold tire inflation pressures are listed on either
the “B” pillar, the Certification Label or in the Tire
Inflation Pressures brochure in the glove compartment.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
Tire Placard Location
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
5
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap–if equipped. This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1mile
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire side wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
5
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited
tread life. When two or more tread wear indicators
appear in adjacent grooves, the temporary use spare
tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings which apply to your spare. Failure to do so
could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle
control.
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use
spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare
tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on vehicle
at the first opportunity.
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
5
WARNING!
The limited use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold
tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire
placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly.
Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first
opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure
to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
See the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section
6 of this manual.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck. And
don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the indicators appear
in 2 or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread
wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion placard for the size designation of your tire. The
service description and load identification will be found
on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, han-
dling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you
contact your original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifi-
cations or capability.
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
5
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
an accident resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
•
Fast tire wear.
•
Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
•
Vehicle pull to right or left.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
for proper diagnosis.
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION
A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passen-
gers {150 lbs (68 kg) each} plus 200 lbs (91kg) of cargo.
Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle
will be found on a “Supplemental Tire Pressure Inflation”
label located on the face of the driver’s door or in the Tire
Information Pressures pamphlet in the glove box.
TIRE CHAINS
Use “Class S” chains on Durango, or other traction aids
that meet SAE Type “S” specifications.
NOTE: Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle,
as recommended by the chain manufacturer.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle, tires or chains, observe the
following precautions:
•
Because of limited chain clearance between tires and other
suspension components, it is important that only chains in
good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious
vehicle damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could suggest chain breakage. Remove the damaged parts
of the chain before further use.
•
Install chains as tightly as possible and then retighten after
driving about 1/2 mile (0.8 km).
•
Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h).
•
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps,
especially with a loaded vehicle.
•
Do not install tire chains on front wheels of 4x2 vehicles.
•
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
•
Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on method
of installation, operating speed, and conditions for usage.
Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain
manufacturer if different than the speed recommended by the
manufacturer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
5
These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, includ-
ing link and cable (radial) chains.
Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires of
Durango trucks.
NOTE: The use of class “S” chains is permitted on
Durangos with P245/70R17 tires.
CAUTION!
Do not use tire chains on 4x4 Durango trucks
equipped with P265/65R17 tires. There may not be
adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking
structural or body damage to your vehicle. Do not
use tire chains on the 4X2 front wheels of Durango
models. There may not be adequate clearance for the
chains and you are risking structural or body dam-
age to your vehicle.
SNOW TIRES
Snow tires should be of the same size and type construc-
tion as the front tires. Consult the manufacturer of the
snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed
requirement associated with the tire. These tires should
always be operated at the vehicle maximum capacity
inflation pressures under any load condition.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile
with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
5
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
All engines (except 5.7L engines) are de-
signed to meet all emissions regulations
and provide excellent fuel economy and
performance when using high quality un-
leaded “regular” gasoline having an oc-
tane rating of 87. The routine use of pre-
mium gasoline is not recommended.
Under normal conditions the use of premium fuel will
not provide a benefit over high quality regular gasolines
and in some circumstances may result in poorer perfor-
mance.
The 5.7L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide satisfac-
tory fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded gasoline hav-
ing an octane range of 87 to 89. The manu-
facturer recommends the use of 89 octane
for optimum performance.The routine use
of premium gasoline is not recommended. The use of
premium gasoline will provide no benefit over high
quality regular and mid-grade gasolines, and in some
circumstances may result in poorer performance.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of “regular” gasoline be-
fore considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers world-wide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance
3.7L/4.7L
Engines
5.7L Engines
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
and durability for your vehicle. We recommend the use
of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they
are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
We strongly support the use of reformulated gasolines.
Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide
excellent performance and durability for the engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing METHANOL.
Gasoline containing methanol may damage critical
fuel system components.
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
5
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasolines
blended with MMT provide no performance advantage
beyond gasolines of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT reduce spark plug
life and reduce emission system performance. We recom-
mend that gasolines free of MMT be used in your vehicle.
The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on
the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your gaso-
line retailer whether or not his/her gasoline contains
MMT.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels
higher than allowed in the United States. MMT is pro-
hibited in Federal and California reformulated gasolines.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasolines sold in the United States are required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in unnecessary cost. There-
fore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
ADDING FUEL
NOTE: If fuel is poured from a portable container, the
container should have a flexible nozzle long enough to
extend into the fuel filler tube.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each
time the vehicle is refueled.
WARNING!
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle or on a
truck bed. You could be burned. Always place gas
containers on the ground while filling.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door. If the gas cap is
lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use
with this vehicle.
NOTE: After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic sys-
tem can determine if the fuel filler cap is loose, improp-
erly installed, or damaged. Aloose fuel filler cap message
will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the
gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an
indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press
the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the
problem persists, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap.
If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving
the problem will turn the MIL light off.
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
5
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system.
WARNING!
•
Remove the fuel tank filler tube cap (gas cap)
slowly to prevent fuel spray from the filler neck
which may cause injury.
•
The volatility of some gasolines may cause a
buildup of pressure in the fuel tank that may
increase while you drive. This pressure can result
in a spray of gasoline and/or vapors when the cap
is removed from a hot vehicle. Removing the cap
slowly allows the pressure to vent and prevents
fuel spray.
•
Never allow any lit smoking materials near the
vehicles while removing the cap or filling the
tank.
•
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance:
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. Using
leaded gasoline can impair engine performance, damage the
emission control system.
•
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions,
can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a
pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may
be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your dealer for service assistance.
•
When pulling a heavy load or driving a fully loaded vehicle
when the humidity is low and the temperature is high, use a
premium unleaded fuel to help prevent spark knock. If spark
knock persists, lighten the load, or engine piston damage may
result.
•
The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane
enhancers is not recommended. Many of these products con-
tain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or
vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
5
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the
precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monox-
ide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill. Never run
the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit
in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an
extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area
with the engine running for more than a short period,
adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance.
Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle
is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired
promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully
open.
•
Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust
gases from entering the vehicle.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device. Under normal
operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not
require maintenance. However, you must keep the en-
gine maintained to assure proper operation and prevent
possible damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
As with any vehicle, do not park or operate this vehicle in
areas where combustible materials such as grass or leaves
can come in contact with a hot exhaust system.
A scorching odor may be detected if you continue to run
a malfunctioning engine. The odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
vehicle allowed to cool. Service, including a tune-up to
manufacturer’s specifications should be obtained imme-
diately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
•
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed.
•
Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods during
very rough idle or malfunctioning operating condi-
tions.
•
Do not allow vehicle to run out of fuel.
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
5
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration Regulations, your vehicle has a certification
label affixed to the driver’s side door.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and shows the Month, Day, and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems. Total load must be limited so that
GVWR is not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options, and cargo.
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the component in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires, or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes
specified by purchasers for increased durability do not
necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
This is the minimum allowable tire size for your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of
this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure (Cold)
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
5
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over front and rear axle. Weighing
the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front
or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met.
Store heavier items down low and be sure that the weight
is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before
driving.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle handles. This could
cause you to lose control. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
Aloaded vehicle is shown in the following example. Note
that neither GVWR nor GAWR capabilities are exceeded.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten service life.
NOTE: The weights shown in this chart are not the
weights for your vehicle. Also, the amount of load
added to both the front and rear axles can be computed
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
after the vehicle has been weighed both in its ⴖcurb
weightⴖ condition, and in its ⴖloaded and ready for
operationⴖ condition.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) 6500 LBS.
TRAILER TOWING
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
Definitions
The following trailer towing related terminology defini-
tions will assist in understanding the subsequent sec-
tions:
GROSS COMBINATION WEIGHT RATING (GCWR)
is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer
when weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings
include a 68 kg (150 lb.) allowance for the presence of a
driver.) Tongue Weight (of a trailer) is the weight placed
on a vehicle’s trailer hitch by the trailer.
GROSS TRAILER WEIGHT (GTW) is the weight of the
trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and
equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for operation⬙ condition.
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
5
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL is a telescoping link that
can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer
tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associ-
ated with the telescoping motion to dampen any un-
wanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
CAUTION!
•
During the first 500 miles (805 km) your new
vehicle is driven, do not tow a trailer. Doing so
may damage your vehicle.
•
When first towing a trailer, limit your speed to 50
mph (80 km/h) during the first 500 miles (805 km)
of towing.
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,
or GCWR, ratings.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Certification label located at the
driver’s door for the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
•
Be sure the trailer is loaded heavier in front, with 60%
to 65% of the weight in front of the axle(s). Loads
balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can
cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which
will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer. Failure
to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many
trailer accidents.
•
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system of
your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause
inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
•
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs. (907 kg).
•
Use an approved trailer harness and connector. If a
hitch is ordered, the proper wiring will be provided.
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chas-
sis structure or tires.
•
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and
will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that
cannot be fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur
that may be difficult for the driver to control.
•
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
5
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer.
•
Connect trailer lighting and brakes using factory har-
nesses only. Do not cut or splice any wiring to the
brake circuits.
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) means the maximum allow-
able weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo and
equipment loaded on the trailer when in actual under-
way towing condition. The recommended way to mea-
sure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle
scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported
by the scale.
Tongue Weight is the weight placed on the vehicle’s
trailer hitch by the trailer. Always load a trailer with 60%
to 65% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places
10% to 15% of the GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle.
Trailer sway control and equalizing hitch are required for
tongue weights above 350 lbs. (159 kg).
Also, there are maximum tongue weight ratings that are
not to be exceeded, as follows:
•
Class IV (the receiver hitch type) 1200 lbs (544 kg)
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Combined Vehicle Weight Rating (GCWR)
The Gross Combined Vehicle Weight Rating (GCWR) is
the MAXIMUM allowable weight of the towing vehicle,
including passengers and cargo, and the weight of the
loaded trailer. Calculate the maximum trailer weight
(MTW) by subtracting the towing vehicle’s weight, in-
cluding passengers, and cargo from GCWR.
Trailer Towing—Hitches:
With a Class IV Hitch, you can tow a trailer with a Gross
Trailer Weight of up to 8, 900 lbs. (4037 kg.) depending on
your vehicle equipment. The Trailer Tow Package in-
cludes the platform hitch receiver, and a 7 lead wiring
harness mounted on the hitch. Tongue weight must be
equal to at least 10% of GTW, but no more that 15% of
GTW.
NOTE: When towing a trailer, the following require-
ments must be adhered to:
•
GCWR must not be exceeded
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
(4) ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight.)
4. GAWR ratings
Trailer Towing Information (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)
ⴖTrailer Towing Guideⴖ
NOTE: For trailer towing information (maximum trailer
weight ratings) refer to the following website address:
http:// www.dodge.com/towing.
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
5
In Canada, refer to the following website address: http://
www.dodge.ca.
Trailer Towing Requirements
All Dodge Durango trucks are intended to tow trailers up
to 2,000 lbs. (907 kg) without added equipment or
alterations to standard equipment. Your vehicle may be
factory equipped for safe towing of trailers over 2,000 lbs.
(907 kg) with the trailer tow package.The electrical part of
this package includes an instruction sheet and wiring
pigtail for an aftermarket electric trailer brake controller.
These items are stored in the glove box.
If you regularly pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop and turn signals on the trailer are recommended for
motoring safety.
When the additional trailer lighting is connected to the
vehicle, the flasher does not provide an indication of
outside lamp/bulb failure. Therefore, an occasional vi-
sual check around the vehicle is recommended. Once the
trailer is removed the above indication will return to the
vehicle.
WARNING!
The direct connection of hydraulic brake lines from
vehicle brake system to trailer system is not accept-
able. The extra load may cause brake failure and you
may be injured.
All Durango models are equipped with an Anti-Lock
Brake System and require an electrically actuated electric
brake controller. A blue colored connector for electric
brake hookup is located under the instrument panel
above the brake pedal.
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
Heavy trailer towing also may require breakaway electric
trailer brakes, anti-sway devices or equalizing hitches for
safe operation. Such devices are commonly required by
state law.
Trailer Tow Wiring
The Trailer Tow Package includes a 4 and 7 pin wiring
harness located at the rear underbody of the vehicle.
NOTE: Connect trailer lighting and brakes using factory
harnesses only. Do not cut or splice wiring to the brake
circuits.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
4 - Pin Connector
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
5
Cooling System Tips—Trailer Towing
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
•
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission
in neutral and increase engine idle speed.
•
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
•
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
•
See Cooling System Operating information in the
Maintenance section of this manual for more informa-
tion.
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat-
ing, turn the “TOW/HAUL” feature on when driving in
hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on
more severe grades. Move the shift lever to the next
lower position to eliminate excessive transmission shift-
ing. This action will also reduce the possibility of trans-
mission overheating and provide better engine braking.
7 - Pin Connector
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
SNOWPLOW
Dodge Durango Models
NOTE: Do not use Dodge Durango Models for snow-
plow applications.
WARNING!
Snowplows, winches, and other aftermarket equip-
ment should not be added to the front end or your
vehicle. The airbag crash sensors may be affected by
the change in the front end structure. The airbags
could deploy unexpectedly or could fail to deploy
during a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
Using this vehicle for snowplow applications can
cause damage to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could ad-
versely affect performance of the airbag system in an
accident. Do not expect that the airbag will perform
as described earlier in this manual
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
5
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Recreational Towing 2WD Models
Recreational towing of 2WD models is not allowable.
Towing the vehicle with the transmission in Neutral can
cause severe transmission damage. Removal of the drive-
shaft for towing is not recommended since this allows
transmission fluid to leak out.
Recreational Towing 4WD Models
CAUTION!
Vehicles equipped with an NV 144 Transfer Case
(which has no neutral position) may NOT be used
for recreational towing.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
despite the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Internal damage to the transfer case will occur if a
front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational
towing.
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The NV 244 Generation II transfer case must be
shifted into Neutral (N) for recreational towing. The
Neutral (N) selection button is located on the lower left
hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. Shifts into and
out of transfer case Neutral (N) can take place with the
selector switch in any mode position.
Shifting into Neutral (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in Neutral (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shut engine OFF.
3. Turn the ignition key to the ON position without
starting the engine.
4. Depress brake pedal.
5. Shift automatic transmission to Neutral (N).
6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
depress the recessed transfer case Neutral (N) button for
4 seconds.
7. After shift is completed and the Neutral (N) light
comes on release Neutral (N) button.
8. Start engine.
9. Shift automatic transmission into Reverse (R).
10. Release brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that
there is no vehicle movement.
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
5
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 with the transmission in Drive
(D).
12. Turn ignition key to the unlocked OFF position.
13. Shift automatic transmission into Park (P).
14. Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar.
NOTE: Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be
met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) selection button,
and must continue to be met until the 4 seconds elaspes
and the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements (with the exception of3-Key
ON) are not met prior to depressing the Neutral (N)
button or are no longer met during the 4 second timer,
then the Neutral (N) indicator light will flash continu-
ously until all requirements are met or until the Neutral
(N) button is released.
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
If the key is not ON, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans-
mission is shifted into Park (P) with the transfer case
in Neutral (N) and the engine RUNNING. With the
transfer case in Neutral (N) ensure that the engine is
OFF prior to shifting the transmission into Park (P)
Shifting OUT of Neutral (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shut engine OFF.
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Turn the ignition key to the ON position without
starting the engine.
4. Depress brake pedal.
5. Shift automatic transmission to Neutral (N).
6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
depress the recessed transfer case Neutral (N) button for
1 second.
7. After the Neutral (N) indicator light turns off release
the Neutral (N) button.
8. After the Neutral (N) button has been released the
transfer case will shift to the position identified by the
selector switch.
9. Shift automatic transmission into Park (P).
10. Start the engine.
11. Shift automatic transmission into Drive (D).
NOTE: Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be
met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) selection button,
and must continue to be met until 1 second elapses and
the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met prior to depress-
ing the Neutral (N) button or are no longer met during
the 1 second time, then all of the position indicator lights
will flash continuously until all requirements are met or
until the Neutral (N) button is released.
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
If the key is not On, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
NOTE: Flashing neutral (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
5
CAUTION!
•
Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
•
Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage
internal parts.
TRACTION
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the car in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PLATE
The equipment Identification Plate is located on the hood
inner surface.
The following information about your vehicle is dis-
played on this plate: Model, Wheelbase, Vehicle Identifi-
cation Number, Truck Order Number, and code numbers
with descriptions of all production and special equip-
ment on the truck as shipped from the factory.
NOTE: Always refer to the Equipment Identification
Plate When Ordering Parts.
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher ..................286
䡵 Adding Fuel ..........................286
䡵 Changing A Flat Tire ....................288
▫ Jack Location ........................288
▫ Removing The Spare Tire ................289
▫ Tire Changing Procedure ................291
䡵 Jump Starting .........................296
䡵 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ........298
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle ................299
▫ Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles ...............299
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles ...............299
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The flasher switch is on the top of the steering column,
just behind the steering wheel. Press the flasher switch
and all front and rear directional signals will flash
intermittently.
Press the switch a second time to turn off the emergency
flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition
key removed and the vehicle locked.
ADDING FUEL
If using a portable fuel container, it should have a flexible
nozzle long enough to reach past the restriction in the
fuel filler tube.
286 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is in a vehicle or on a truck
bed. You could be burned. Always place gas contain-
ers on the ground while filling.
WARNING!
Remove the gas cap slowly to prevent fuel spray
from the filler neck which may cause injury.
The volatility of present gasolines may cause a build
up of pressure in the fuel tank that may increase
while you drive. This pressure can result in a spray
of gasoline and/or vapors when you remove the cap
from a hot vehicle. Removing the cap slowly allows
the pressure to vent and prevents fuel spray.
Never allow any lit smoking materials near the
vehicles while removing the cap or filling the tank.
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 287
6
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
Jack Location
In the Durango, the scissor jack and tire changing tools
are stowed under the second row seat.
The jack is secured in place with a winged stud and a
fixed stud. It is very important to secure the jack tightly
in place by engaging the slot in the base to the fixed stud
under the middle seat. The winged stud inserts through
the eyelet in the end of the jack’s worm screw.
288 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
The jack is designed as a tool for changing tires only.
The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for
service purposes, unless suitable supports are placed
under the vehicle as a safety measure. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid
ice or slippery areas.
Removing The Spare Tire
The spare tire on the Dodge Durango is located under-
neath the vehicle in the rear.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 289
6
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack the truck.
1. Remove the rubber plug from the floor in the cargo
area.
2. Engage the jack wrench extension to the spare tire
winch through the hole in the floor.
3. Turn the wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare
tire. Continue to turn the wrench until the spare tire can
be pulled out from under the vehicle.
It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to
avoid tangling the loose cable.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or
other power tools is not recommended and can
damage the winch.
290 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tire Changing Procedure
WARNING!
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Do not raise this vehicle using a bumper jack. The scissor
jack is designed as a tool for changing tires on this vehicle
only. It is not recommended that the jack be used for
service purposes or to lift more than one wheel at a time.
Preparations
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or
slippery areas. Set the parking brake and place the gear
selector in PARK (automatic transmission). On Four
Wheel Drive vehicles, shift the transfer case to the “4L”
position.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 291
6
•
Block both the front and rear
of the wheel diagonally oppo-
site the jacking position. For
example, if the right front
wheel is being changed, block
the left rear wheel.
•
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked.
Instructions
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove,
the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. When changing a front wheel, place the jack under the
frame rail behind the wheel. Locate the jack as far
forward as possible on the straight part of the frame
(prior to inboard transition. Operate the jack using the
jack drive tube and the wheel wrench - the tube exten-
sion, may be used but is not required.
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive
tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the
extension tube. Place the jack under the axle as close to
Front Jacking Location
292 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
the tire as posssible with the drive tubes extending to the
rear. Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that
the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and
adjust the jack position as required.
4. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the
vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.
Rear Left Jacking Location
Rear Right Jacking Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 293
6
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle unstable and cause an accident. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. Install
the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To
avoid risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully
tighten the nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
6. Using the wheel wrench, finish tightening the nuts in
a crisscross pattern. Correct nut tightness is 85-115 ft. lbs.
(115-155 N·m) torque. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
your dealer or at a service station.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle.
Always stow the jack, tools and the extra tire and
wheel in the places provided.
7. Remove wheel blocks. Do not install chrome or alu-
minum wheel center caps on the spare wheel. This may
result in cap damage.
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow the
replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described.
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
294 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge
of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking.
• Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of
motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the value stem
facing the ground.
To Stow The Flat Or Spare
Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down. Slide the
wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and
position it properly across the wheel opening.
For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation, stow
with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle.
Rotate the winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn
into place against the underside of the vehicle. Continue
to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click
2 times. It cannot be overtightened. Push against the tire
several times to be sure it is firmly in place.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 295
6
JUMP STARTING
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or cloth-
ing. Don’t lean over battery when attaching
clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If
acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the con-
taminated area immediately with large quantities
of water.
•
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam-
mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
from the vent holes. Do not use a booster battery
or any other booster source with an output that
exceeds 12 volts.
Check the Battery Test Indicator (if equipped). If a light or
bright colored dot is visible in the indicator (if equipped),
DO NOT jump-start the battery.
If the indicator (if equipped) is dark or shows a green dot,
proceed as follows:
1. Wear eye protection and remove all metal jewelry such
as watch bands or bracelets which might make an
unintended electrical contact.
2. Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but with-
out letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake, place
the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the ignition
OFF on both vehicles.
3. Turn OFF heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
loads.
296 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged
battery.
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine of the
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have
a good contact on the engine.
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the
discharge battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode.
During cold weather when temperatures are below
freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged battery
may freeze. Do not attempt jump starting because
the battery could rupture or explode. The battery
temperature must be brought up above freezing
point before attempting jump start.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 297
6
WARNING!
Any procedure other than above could result in:
1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting
out the battery vent;
2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion;
3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow
hooks.
WARNING!
Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury or
death.
WARNING!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps and chains may break, causing
serious injury.
298 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use of safety chains is recom-
mended. Attach towing device to main structural mem-
bers of the vehicle — not to bumpers or associated
brackets. State and local laws applying to vehicles
under tow must be observed.
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised
and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Provided that the transmission is operable, tow with the
transmission in Neutral and the ignition key in the OFF
position along with the front wheels raised and the rear
wheels on the ground. The speed must not exceed 30
mph (50 km/h) and the distance must not exceed 15
miles (25 km).
If the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (25 km ),
it must be towed on a flatbed, or with the rear wheels
raised and the front wheels on the ground, or with the
front end raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 299
6
NOTE: Towing the vehicle at more than 30 mph (50
km/h) or for more than 15 miles (25 km ) can cause
severe transmission damage.
300 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment 3.7L V6 ..............304
䡵 Engine Compartment 4.7L V-8 ..............305
䡵 Engine Compartment 5.7L HEMI V-8 .........306
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II ........307
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............307
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs ............................308
䡵 Replacement Parts ......................309
䡵 Dealer Service .........................310
䡵 Maintenance Procedures ..................310
▫ Engine Oil ..........................311
▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................314
▫ Drive Belts — Check Condition And
Tensioner ...........................315
▫ Spark Plugs .........................315
▫ Ignition Cables .......................316
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................316
▫ Engine Fuel Filter .....................316
7
▫ Catalytic Converter ....................317
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ................318
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............319
▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check ............320
▫ Front Suspension Ball Joints ..............321
▫ Drive Shaft Constant Velocity Joints ........321
▫ Body Lubrication .....................321
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ................322
▫ Windshield Washers ...................322
▫ Exhaust System ......................323
▫ Cooling System .......................324
▫ Emission Related Components ............329
▫ Brake System ........................330
▫ Automatic Transmission ................332
▫ Transfer Case ........................335
▫ Axles ..............................335
▫ Selection Of Lubricating Grease ...........336
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................337
䡵 Power Distribution Center (Fuse/Relay) .......341
䡵 Fuse Block ............................341
▫ Interior Fuses ........................342
▫ Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center) .345
▫ Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module) .347
䡵 Replacement Light Bulbs .................348
䡵 Bulb Replacement ......................349
302 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Headlights/Parking/Turn Signal ..........349
▫ Rear Side Marker, Tail Lights, Turn Signals And
Backup Lights — Replacement ............350
▫ License Lights ........................354
▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplight ...........355
▫ Fog Lights ..........................356
䡵 Fluids And Capacities ...................357
䡵 Recommended Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine
Parts ................................359
▫ Engine .............................359
▫ Chassis ............................360
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 303
7
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3.7L V6
304 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 4.7L V-8
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 305
7
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5.7L HEMI V-8
306 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indica-
tor Light” on could cause further damage to the
emission control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
serviced before any emissions tests can be per-
formed.
•
If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic con-
verter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged. A loose fuel filler cap message will
be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 307
7
cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication
that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer
reset button to turn the message off. If the problem
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving
the problem will turn the MIL light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states which have an I/M (Inspection and
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
for testing.
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do
the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL light will blink for approximately 5 sec-
onds and then remain on until the first engine crank or
the key is turned off. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
b. The MILlight will remain fully illuminated until the
first engine crank or the key is turned off. This means
that your vehicle’s OBD system is ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently
serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may
need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD system to update.
A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate
that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on
with the engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopar威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 309
7
DEALER SERVICE
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The
best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes
after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
1. Position the vehicle on a level surface.
2. Turn Off the engine and allow approximately 5 min-
utes for the oil to settle to the bottom of the crankcase.
3. Remove the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
4. Wipe the engine oil level indicator (dipstick) clean.
5. Install the engine oil level indicator (dipstick) and
make sure it is seated in the tube.
6. Remove the engine oil level indicator (dipstick), keep-
ing the handle above the tip, and read the oil level on the
engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
7. Add oil only if the level is below the “SAFE” range (at
or below the “ADD” mark) on the engine oil level
indicator (dipstick). Adding one quart of oil when the
reading is at the ADD mark will result in a reading at the
top of the SAFE range..
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311
7
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could dam-
age your engine.
Frequency Of Oil Change
Road conditions and your style of driving affect the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following to determine if ANY apply to you:
•
Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
•
Stop and Go driving.
•
Extensive engine idling.
•
Driving in dusty conditions.
•
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km).
•
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
•
Trailer towing, Taxi, Police or delivery service (com-
mercial service).
•
Off-Road or desert operation.
•
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil
at every interval shown on schedule ⬙A⬙ of the ⬙Mainte-
nance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
4x4 Models, If Used Primarily For Off-Road Operation
Every 50 hours of use.
312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Dusty Conditions
Driving through dust-laden air increases the problems of
keeping abrasive materials out of the engine. Under these
conditions, special attention should be given to the
engine air cleaner and the crankcase inlet air cleaner. The
crankcase ventilation system should also be checked
periodically. Make sure that these units are always clean.
This will tend to reduce to a minimum the amount of
abrasive material that may enter the engine.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacture only
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard
MS-6395. Use Mopar or an equivalent oil meeting the
specification MS-6395.
Engine Oil Identification (API) Symbol
There is a symbol to aid you in selecting the proper
engine oil.
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacture only recommends
API Certified engine oils that
meet the requirements of
DaimlerChrysler Material Stan-
dard MS-6395. Use Mopar or an
equivalent oil meeting the specifi-
cation MS-6395.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
For 3.7L/4.7L engines SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recom-
mended for all operating temperatures. For 5.7L en-
gines SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all
operating temperatures.These engine oils improve low
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313
7
temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Refer to
your engine oil filler cap for the recommended engine
oil viscosity for your vehicle.
For information on engine oil filler cap location, see the
Engine Compartment illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
There are a number of engine oils being promoted as
either synthetic or semi-synthetic. If you chose to use
such a product, use only those oils that meet the Ameri-
can Petroleum Institute (API) and SAE viscosity stan-
dard. Follow the service schedule that describes your
driving type.
Materials Added to Engine Oils
The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad-
ditives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or
governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar威 Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tensioner
Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic
tensioner. No belt tension adjustments are required.
However, belt and belt tensioner condition should be
inspected at the specified intervals, and replaced if re-
quired. See your authorized dealer for service. At the
mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule, all belts
and tensioner should be checked for condition. Improper
belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure. Belts
should be inspected for evidence of cuts, cracks, glazing,
or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication of
damage which could result in belt failure. Low generator
belt tension can cause battery failure. Also check belt
routing to make sure there is no interference between the
belts and other engine components.
Spark Plugs
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure proper engine
performance and emission control. The plugs installed in
your vehicle should operate satisfactorily in normal
service for the mileage indicated in the Maintenance
Chart. New plugs should be installed at this mileage. The
entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction
due to a faulty spark plug. Check the Vehicle Emissions
Control Information label for the proper type of spark
plug for your vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315
7
CAUTION!
When replacing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Ignition Cables
Replace the ignition cables (5.7L engines only) at the
mileage interval shown in the maintenance charts.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Under normal driving conditions, replace the air filter at
the intervals shown on Schedule “A”. If, however, you
drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe con-
ditions, the filter element should be inspected periodi-
cally and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on
Schedule “B”.
WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Fuel Filter
A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling, limit the speed at
which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting.
Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the
fuel tank, frequent filter replacement may be necessary.
316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317
7
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex-
haust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in
areas where your exhaust system can contact any-
thing that can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be ob-
tained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Maintenance-Free Battery
All Dodge trucks are equipped with maintenance-free
batteries. You will never have to add water, nor is
periodic maintenance required.
318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Always wash hands
after handling the battery.
To determine the battery charge, check the battery test
indicator (if equipped) on top of the battery. Refer to the
illustration.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked (+) positive
and negative (-) and identified on the battery case.
Also, if a “fast charger” is used while battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319
7
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer
to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar-
bon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro-
tection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
Power Steering — Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.⬙
320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.
Front Suspension Ball Joints
The ball joints and seals should be inspected whenever
the vehicle is serviced for other reasons. Damaged seals
should be replaced to prevent leakage or contamination
of the grease.
Drive Shaft Constant Velocity Joints
All four wheel drive models are equipped with four
constant velocity joints. Periodic lubrication of these
joints is not required. However, the joint boot should be
inspected for external leakage or damage periodically. If
external leakage or damage is evident, the joint boot and
grease should be replaced immediately. Continued op-
eration could result in failure of the joint due to water
and dirt contamination of the grease. This would require
complete replacement of the joint assembly. Refer to the
Service Manual for the detailed replacement procedure.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, doors,liftgate and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the appli-
cation of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321
7
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
nents to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar威 Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield
should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accu-
mulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
Windshield Washers
The fluid reservoir should be checked for fluid level at
regular intervals. When freezing weather is anticipated,
flush out the water in the reservoir by operating the
system. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer anti-
freeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate the system
for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a
few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Mopar威 All
Weather Windshield Washer Solution used with water as
directed on the container, aids cleaning action, reduces
freezing point to avoid line clogging, and is not harmful
to paint or trim.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 323
7
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, fol-
low the preceding safety tips.
Cooling System
Inspection
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
coolant. Check face of radiator for any accumulation of
bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean the radiator core by gently
spraying water from a garden hose at the back of the core.
Check the coolant bottle tubing for condition and tight-
ness of connection at coolant bottle and radiator. Inspect
the entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the coolant pressure cap for proper
vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of coolant
from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing prop-
erly, the coolant will begin to drain from the coolant
bottle. Do not remove the pressure cap when the cooling
system is hot.
324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or
steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood don’t open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. If you open
the hood and see steam or hot coolant escaping from
the radiator, don’t touch anything. Get away quickly.
Never try to open a pressure cap when the radiator is
hot.
Cooling System Maintenance
At the intervals shown in the Maintenance Schedules
section of this manual, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled. See your authorized dealer for
proper cooling system maintenance.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
If the solution is dirty and contains a considerable
amount of sediment, it should be cleaned and flushed.
See your authorized dealer for proper draining, flushing
and refilling of your vehicle’s cooling system.
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. Do not store ethylene glycol based engine
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. Prevent ingestion by animals and
children. If ingested by a child contact a physician
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 325
7
Recommended Engine Coolant
This vehicle has been factory filled with an Ethylene
Glycol based engine coolant with long life corrosion
inhibitors (called HOAT, for Hybrid Organic Additive
Technology). Follow the “Maintenance Schedule” for the
recommended coolant change intervals. Refer to Recom-
mended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of coolants other than specified engine
coolant, may result in engine damage, and de-
crease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT cool-
ant is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, it should be replaced with the speci-
fied coolant as soon as possible.
•
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use
additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propy-
lene Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Coolant
When adding coolant, or refilling the system, a minimum
solution of 50% recommended HOAT ethylene glycol
engine coolant (antifreeze) and distilled water should be
used. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if
temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are anticipated.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of
corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
WARNING!
Never add coolant to the radiator when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove pressure cap to
cool overheated engine. The coolant is under pres-
sure and severe scalding could result.
Coolant Pressure Cap
The coolant pressure cap must be fully tightened to
prevent loss of coolant, and to insure that coolant will
return to the radiator from the coolant coolant bottle.
The pressure cap should be inspected and cleaned if there
is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing
surfaces.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327
7
WARNING!
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
coolant pressure cap are a safety precaution. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pres-
sure cap when the system is hot or under pressure.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle system provides a quick visual method
for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With
the engine idling, and warmed to normal operating
temperature, remove the cap from the bottle, remove the
dipstick and wipe the excess coolant from it. Reinsert the
dipstick and remove. Observe the dipstick checking the
holes along the stem for coolant. Check the coolant level
whenever the hood is raised.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the pressure cap except checking
coolant freeze point or replacement with new antifreeze
coolant. Your service attendant should be advised of this.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Points To Remember
A. Do not overfill the coolant bottle.
B. Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant bottle. If antifreeze needs to be added, contents of
coolant bottle also must be protected against freezing.
C. If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the coolant bottle does not drop when the engine
cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for
leaks.
328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
D. Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT ethyl-
ene glycol engine coolant (minimum) and distilled water
for proper corrosion protection of your engine.
E. Make sure that the radiator and coolant bottle over-
flow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
F. Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean also.
G. The thermostat should not be changed for summer or
winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory cooling performance.
Emission Related Components
Fuel System Hoses And Vapor/Vacuum Harnesses
When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance,
inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of
heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, checking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive
swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber. Particular
attention should be given to examining hose surfaces
nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust mani-
fold.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they
are secure and no leaks are present.
NOTE: Fluids such as oil, power steering fluid, and
brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations to
ease the assembly of hoses to couplings. Therefore, oil
wetness at the hose-coupling area is not necessarily an
indication of leakage. Actual dripping of hot fluid when
systems are under pressure (during vehicle operation),
should be noted before hose is replaced based on leakage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329
7
You are urged to use only the manufacturer’s specified
hoses and clamps, or their equivalent in material and
specification, in any fuel system servicing. It is manda-
tory to replace all clamps that have been loosened or
removed during service. Care should be taken in install-
ing new clamps to insure they are properly torqued.
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve
Proper operation of the crankcase ventilation system
requires that the PCV valve be free of sticking or plug-
ging because of deposits. Deposits can accumulate in the
PCV valve and passage with increasing mileage. Have
the PCV valve, hoses, and passages checked for proper
operation at the intervals specified. If the valve is
plugged or sticking, replace with a new valve – Do not
attempt to clean the PCV valve! Check ventilating hose
for indication of damage or plugging with deposits.
Replace if necessary.
Brake System
Power Disc Brakes (Front)
Disc brakes do not require adjustment; however, several
hard stops during the break-in period are recommended
to seat the linings and wear off any foreign material.
330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Brake Master Cylinders
The fluid level in the master cylinders should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid
to bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir
of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of
the master cylinder area before removing the cap. With
disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when
pads are replaced. If the brake fluid level is abnormally
low, check system for leaks.
Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts for correct fluid type.
WARNING!
Use of brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point, or is unidentified, as to specifications
may result in sudden brake failure during hard
prolonged braking. You could have an accident.
WARNING!
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching on fire.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331
7
CAUTION!
Do not allow a petroleum-base fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Seal damage may result.
Brake Hoses
Inspection should be performed whenever the brake
system is serviced or at intervals specified. Inspect hy-
draulic brake hoses for surface cracking, scuffing or worn
spots. If there is any evidence of cracking, scuffing, or
worn spots, the hose should be replaced immediately!
Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place with
possible burst failure.
WARNING!
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any sign of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal
operating temperature 180°F (82°C). This occurs after at
least 15 miles (24 km) of driving. At normal operating
temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be-
tween the fingertips.
To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly,
the following procedure must be used:
332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating
temperature.
2. The vehicle must be on level ground.
3. Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake
pedal.
4. Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear
position ending with the lever in P (Park).
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
seated.
6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat-
ing temperature. Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on
both sides of the dipstick. If the fluid is low, add as
required into the dipstick tube. Do not overfill. After
adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube, wait
a minimum of two (2) minutes for the oil to fully drain
into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level.
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick
with the fluid at approximately 70°F ( 21°C) (room
temperature). If the fluid level is correctly established at
room temperature, it should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches
180°F ( 82°C). Remember it is best to check the level at the
normal operating temperature.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333
7
CAUTION!
Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50°F
(10°C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to
produce an accurate reading.
7. Check for leaks. Release parking brake.
To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission
after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the
dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the
dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated
position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the
dipstick tube.
Automatic Transmission Fluid And Filter Change
It is important that proper lubricant is used in the
transmission. Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants
and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type. It is important
that the transmission fluid be maintained at the pre-
scribed level using the recommended fluid.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturers recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives to the transmission. Exception to
this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting
334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
fluid leaks. The use of transmission sealers should be
avoided, since they may adversely affect seals.
Transfer Case
Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks. If a fluid leak is
evident the transfer case fluid level may be low. Have the
transfer case serviced immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage may result from operation of the vehicle
with low transfer case fluid.
The transfer case fluid should be drained and refilled at
the intervals specified.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts for correct fluid type.
Axles
Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts for correct fluid type.
The manufacturer does not recommend regularly sched-
uled oil changes for axles in vehicles whose operation is
classified as normal truck service.
NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differential
components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be
encountered in some off-highway types of service, will
require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
Rear Axle
Rear Axle fluid levels should be 7/8⬙ (22 mm) below the
fill hole for 8 1/4⬙ axles, and 1 1/4⬙ (31 mm) below the fill
hole for 9 1/4⬙ axles.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335
7
Front Axle
Front Axle fluid level should be 3/4” (20 mm) below the
bottom of the fill hole.
Selection of Lubricating Grease
The National Lubricating Grease Institute (NLGI) has
developed a symbol (Certification Mark) to aid the
vehicle owner in the proper selection of grease for chassis
components. This symbol, an example shown below, is
located on the grease container and identifies the appli-
cation and quality of the grease.
There are two groups
identified, those for wheel
bearings (Letter “G”) and
those for chassis (Letter
“L”) lubrication. Perfor-
mance categories within
these groups result in dual
letter designations for
each group. The letter des-
ignations shown in the ex-
ample are the highest
quality level available and when combined as shown can
be used for chassis lubrication. Use only those greases
that have the NLGI symbol on the container along with
the proper quality level for your application.
336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
•
Stone and gravel impact.
•
Insects, tree sap and tar.
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using a mild car wash soap, and
rinse the panels completely with clear water.
•
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, wash it as soon as possible.
•
Use Mopar威 auto polish to remove road film and
stains and to polish your vehicle. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337
7
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and liftgate be kept clear
and open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibil-
ity of the owner.
•
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly
with mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To
remove heavy soil, select a nonabrasive, non-acidic
cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush or metal polishes. Only Mopar威 cleaners are
recommended. Do not use oven cleaner. Avoid auto-
matic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh
brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective fin-
ish.
338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use Mopar威 touch up paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the
color of your vehicle.
Interior Care
Use Mopar威 Fabric Cleaner to clean fabric upholstery
and carpeting.
Use Mopar威 Vinyl Cleaner to clean vinyl upholstery and
trim.
Mopar威 Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopar威 Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339
7
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with any commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric
defrosters or windshields equipped with a windshield
wiper de-icer. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instru-
ments which may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag.A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER (FUSE/RELAY)
Your vehicle is equipped with two electrical power
distribution centers located next to each other in the left
side of the engine compartment.
The power distribution centers house new plug-in
“Maxi” fuses which replace all the in-line fusible links
previously used. The power distribution centers also
contain “Mini”fuses and plug-in “ISO” relays. A label
inside the latching cover of the Power Distribution Cen-
ters identifies each component for ease of replacement, if
necessary. These fuses and relays can be obtained from
your dealer.
FUSE BLOCK
CAUTION!
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it suggests a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
NOTE: If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for
longer than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect
your battery. You may do this by disconnecting the
battery or by disconnecting the two ignition-off draw
(I.O.D.) fuses located in the Auxiliary Power Distribution
Center (PDC) located in the engine compartment. The
I.O.D. cavities include a snap-in retainer that allows the
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341
7
fuse to be disconnected, without removing it from the
fuse block. Pressing the I.O.D. fuse back into the cavity
reconnects it.
Interior Fuses
The fuse block contains blade-type mini-fuses, relays,
and circuit breakers for high-current circuits. It is located
in the left kick panel. It is accessible through a snap-in
cover.
342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Fuse/Color Description
F1 15 Amp Blue
Instrument Clus-
ter Battery Feed
F 2 10 Amp Red
Occupant Classi-
fication Module
(OCM) Battery
Feed
F3 10 Amp Red
Ignition Run/
Start for Control-
ler (NGC), Inte-
grated Power
Module (IPM),
AC Relay and
Fuel Pump Re-
lay
F4 10 Amp Red
Door Node and
Non-Memory
Power Mirror
Switch Battery
Feed
Fuse Block
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343
7
F5 (2) 10 Amp Red
Airbags (2 Fuses
in Yellow
Holder)
F6 10 Amp Red
Ignition Run/
Start Unlock
F7 25 Amp Natural
Radio Battery
Feed
F8 10 Amp Red
Ignition Run/
Start fro
Cluster/Transfer
Case/Seat Sw.
Back lighting
F9 10 Amp Red
SDAR/DVD Bat-
tery Feed
F10 10 Amp Red Spare
F11 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors
F12 20 Amp Yellow
Cluster Battery
Feed
F13 10 Amp Red
Ignition Run
HVAC Module/
Heated Rear
Glass (EBL) Re-
lay
F14 10 Amp Red
ABS Module Ig-
nition Run
F15 15 Amp Blue
Battery Feed
Blue Tooth,
Compass/Trip
Computer
(CMTC), Sentry
Key Diagnostics
F16 20 Amp Yellow
Reconfigurable
Power Outlets
F17 20 Amp Yellow
Cigar Lighter
Ignition
F18 10 Amp Red Spare Fuse
344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
F19 15 Amp Blue
Heating & Air
Conditioning
w/ATC Only
Battery Feed
F20 25 Amp Natural
Amplifier Bat-
tery Feed
Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center)
Cavity Fuse/Color Description
1 40 Amp
Green
HVAC Blower
2 30 Amp Pink Power Outlets
3 30 Amp Pink Rr Wiper/Ign R/O
4 30 Amp Pink ABS Pump
5 50 Amp Red Cabin Htr 1 (Diesel Only)
6 50 Amp Red ASD
7 30 Amp Pink Rr HVAC (XK)
Cavity Fuse/Color Description
8 40 Amp
Green
Acc Delay/Seats
9 Spare
10 40 Amp
Green
Starter/JB Power
11 30 Amp Pink Cig Ltr/T-Tow
12 40 Amp
Green
EBL/Htd Mirror
13 40 Amp
Green
JB Power
14 50 Amp Red Cabin Htr 2 (Diesel Only)
15 50 Amp Red Cabin Htr 3 (Diesel Only)
16 25 Amp
Natural
IPM/Coils
17 Spare
18 20 Amp Yel-
low
TCM/AC Clutch
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345
7
Cavity Fuse/Color Description
19 20 Amp Yel-
low
Ign Sw
20 20 Amp Yel-
low
PCM Batt (Gasoline Only)
21 30 Amp Pink ABS Valves
22 Spare
23 20 Amp Yel-
low
FDCM
24 20 Amp Yel-
low
Fuel Pump
25 20 Amp Yel-
low
FDCM/E-Diff.
26 15 Amp Lt.
Blue
Hyd/PCM (Diesel Only)
27 15 Amp Lt.
Blue
Brake/Stop Lamps
Cavity Fuse/Color Description
28 25 Amp
Natural
NGC/Injectors
29 Spare
30 Spare
31 Mini Relay Cabin Htr 1 Rly (Diesel
Only)
32 Micro Relay TCM Rly (Gasoline Only)
33 Micro Relay Starter Rly
34 Micro Relay AC Clutch Rly
35 Micro Relay Fuel Pump Rly
36 Mini Relay Cabin Htr 3 Rly (Diesel
Only)
38 Mini Relay Cabin Htr 2 Rly (Diesel
Only)
39 Mini Relay HVAC Blower Rly
40 Mini Relay ASD Rly
346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module)
Cavity Fuse/Color Description
1 Micro Relay Wiper On/Off Rly
2 Micro Relay Wiper Hi/Lo Rly
3 Micro Relay Horn Rly
4 Micro Relay Rear Fog Rly (BUX Only)
5 Micro Relay Lt T-Tow Stop/Turn Rly
6 Micro Relay Rt T-Tow Stop/Turn Rly
7 Micro Relay Park Lamps Rly
8 10 Amp Red Lt Park Lamps
9 10 Amp Red T-Tow Park Lamps
10 10 Amp Red Rt Park Lamps
11 Mini Relay Rad Fan Hi Rly
12 20 Amp Yel-
low
FCM Batt #4
13 20 Amp Yel-
low
FCM Batt #2
Cavity Fuse/Color Description
14 20 Amp Yel-
low
Adjustable Pedal
15 20 Amp Yel-
low
Ft Fog Lamps
16 20 Amp Yel-
low
Horn
17 20 Amp Yel-
low
Rear Fogs
18 20 Amp Yel-
low
FCM Batt #1
19 20 Amp Yel-
low
Lt T-Tow Stop/Turn
20 20 Amp Yel-
low
FCM Batt #3
21 20 Amp Yel-
low
Rt T-Tow Stop/Turn
22 30 Amp Pink FDCM Mod
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347
7
Cavity Fuse/Color Description
23 50 Amp Red Rad Fan
24 Mini Relay Rad Fan Lo Rly
25 Micro Relay Ft Fog Lamps Rly
26 Micro Relay Adjustable Pedal Rly
27 15 Amp Lt.
Blue
IOD #1
28 20 Amp Yel-
low
IOD #2 (Audio)
29 10 Amp Red ORC (Ign R/.S)
30 10 Amp Red ORC (Ign R/O)
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb No.
Dome Light ........................ WL212–2
Liftgate Lamp ........................... 567
Overhead Console Lights ............. PLW214–2A
Reading Light....................... WL212–2
Visor Vanity Lights ............... NotServiceable
LIGHT BULBS — Outside Bulb No.
Headlight ............................. H13
Front Park/Turn/Sidemarker ............. 3457AK
Front Auxilliary Park...................... 194
Back-Up .............................. 3057
Center High Mounted Stoplight .............. 921
Fog Lamp ........................... 9006LL
Rear Sidemarker ......................... 168
License Plate Light ....................... 168
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal................. 3057
348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlights/Parking/Turn Signal
1. Remove the two bolts attaching the headlight to the
inner fender panel.
2. Remove one nut that attaches the headlight to the
inner fender panel. Access to the nut is possible by
removing the fender panel access door which is located
in the wheel liner.
3. Grasp the headlight and pull firmly to disengage the
headlight from the fender panel.
4. While firmly holding the headlight in your hands
disconnect all connectors by following the procedure
described in step number 5 below.
5. Remove the bulb connector from the headlight making
sure to pull and release the red tab on all connectors.
Loosen the connector by pressing down on the black
and/or green release which is located below or above the
red tab. The green release is located above the red tab on
the 9008, the black release is located above the 3457AK
red tab, and the black release is located below the 194 red
tab.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349
7
6. Twist and remove socket from lamp.
7. Remove bulb from socket and replace.
NOTE: These are Halogen bulbs. Take care not to touch
the bulb with your fingers. Body oils from your fingers
could cause excessive heat build-up which reduces bulb
life.
Rear Side Marker, Tail Lights, Turn Signals And
Backup Lights — Replacement
1. Remove the two push-pins from the tail light housing.
350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Rotate the light to the outboard side of the vehicle and
remove.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351
7
3. Unlock and remove electrical connector. 4. Remove the three screws holding the bulb strip to the
back of the tail lamp.
352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Remove the bulb strip from the tail light lens. 6. Remove bulbs from bulb strip by pulling the bulb
straight out.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353
7
License Lights
1. Remove the two screws securing the lens to the
liftgate.
354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Rotate the socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
3. Pull bulb from socket.
Center High-Mounted Stoplight
1. Remove two screws securing stoplight housing assem-
bly to the liftgate.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355
7
2. Turn socket 1/4 counterclockwise and free from hous-
ing.
3. Pull bulb straight from socket to remove.
Fog Lights
1. Rotate bulb and connector 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
2. Pull bulb off of connector.
NOTE: For foglights ensure that the takeout push-
fasteners are relocated back in their positions; one in the
foglight molding and the other in the hydroform.
356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel
3.7L/4.7L, 87 Octane 27 Gal. 102L
5.7L, 89 Octane 27 Gal 102L
Engine Oil (with filter)
3.7L, SAE 5W-30, API Certified 5 Qt. 4.7L
4.7L, SAE 5W-30, API Certified 6 Qt. 5.7L
5.7L, SAE 5W-20, API Certified 7 Qt. 6.6L
Cooling System (includes 2.1 Qts./2L for coolant
bottle
3.7L without Rear Heat (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula)
13.5 Qt. 12.9L
3.7L with Rear Heat (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula)
14.5 Qt. 13.8L
4.7L without Rear Heat (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula)
13.1 Qt. 12.5L
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357
7
U.S. Metric
4.7L with Rear Heat (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula)
14.2 Qt. 13.5L
5.7L without Rear Heat (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula)
NA NA
5.7L with Rear Heat (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula)
16.6 Qt. 15.8L
NOTE: All fluid capacities are approximate.
358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND
GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Engine Coolant Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Or-
ganic Additive Technology) P/N 5011764AB or equivalent.
3.7/4.7L Engine Oil Use SAE 5W-30, API Certified, meeting material standard MS-6395 or equiva-
lent.
5.7L Engine Oil Use SAE 5W-20, API Certified, meeting material standard MS-6395 or equiva-
lent.
Engine Oil Filter Mopar威 Engine Oil Filter, P/N 5281090 or equivalent.
Spark Plugs Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine com-
partment.
Fuel Selection 3.7L/4.7L 87 Octane, (R+M)/2 Method
Fuel Selection 5.7L 89 Octane, (R+M)/2 Method
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359
7
Chassis
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts.
Automatic Transmission Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Transfer Case Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Front Axle SAE 75W-90 Multipurpose Type, GL-5 Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Rear Axle SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Brake Master Cylinder Mopar威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3
brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recom-
mended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Emission Control System Maintenance ........362
䡵 Emissions Testing .......................362
䡵 Maintenance Schedules ...................363
▫ Schedule “B” ........................366
▫ Schedule “A” ........................377
䡵 Vehicle Storage ........................381
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold
type on the following pages must be done at the times or
mileages specified to assure the continued proper func-
tioning of the emission control system. These, and all
other maintenance services included in this manual,
should be done to provide best vehicle performance and
reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for
vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty
areas and very short trip driving.
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emis-
sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part which has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
EMISSIONS TESTING
In some localities, it may be or will become a legal
requirement to ensure that all emissions components and
systems are functioning properly as a part of the test
procedure. The test center accomplishes this by checking
the On Board Diagnostic System (OBD) system with an
electronic scan tool. If your vehicle has recently been
serviced, the OBD system may have been reset to a ⬙not
ready⬙ condition because the OBD system has not had
sufficient time since the servicing to reconfirm that
emissions components are operating properly. In most
cases, a reasonable mix and amount of normal city and
highway driving and at least one overnight-off period
will be required to prepare your vehicle for this check;
however your dealer has the equipment and procedures
required to make certain that the OBD system of your
vehicle is ready for the required testing.
362 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
There are two maintenance schedules that show the
required service for your vehicle.
First is Schedule “B”. It is for vehicles that are operated
under the conditions that are listed below and at the
beginning of the schedule.
•
Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
•
Stop and go driving.
•
Extensive engine idling.
•
Driving in dusty conditions.
•
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
•
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).
•
Trailer towing.
•
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).
•
Off-road or desert operation.
•
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
coolant every 102,000 miles (163 000 km) or 60 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions
listed for Schedule ⬙B⬙.
Second is Schedule “A”. It is for vehicles that are not
operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched-
ule ⬙B⬙.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 363
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi-
tions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the
interval that occurs first.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
At Each Stop for Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu-
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
364 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Once a Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
•
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and transmission and add as needed.
•
Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the exhaust system.
•
Inspect the brake hoses.
•
Inspect the CV joints (if equipped) and front suspen-
sion components.
•
Check the automatic transmission fluid level.
•
Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 365
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Schedule “B”
Follow schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle
under one or more of the following conditions.
•
Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
•
Stop and go driving.
•
Extensive engine idling.
•
Driving in dusty conditions.
•
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
•
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).
•
Trailer towing.
•
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).
•
Off-road or desert operation.
•
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
coolant every 102,000 miles (163 000 km) or 60 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
366 SCHEDULE “B”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 3,000 6,000 9,000 12,000 15,000
(Kilometers) (5 000) (10 000) (14 000) (19 000) (24 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
months whichever comes first.
X X XXX
Rotate tires. X X
Change rear axle fluid. X
Change front axle fluid (4X4). X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary.
X
SCHEDULE “B” 367
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 18,000 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000
(Kilometers) (29 000) (34 000) (38 000) (43 000) (48 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
months whichever comes first.
X X XXX
Rotate tires. X X X
Change rear axle fluid. X
Change front axle fluid (4X4). X
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). X
Inspect brake linings. X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary.
X
Replace spark plugs. X
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** X
368 SCHEDULE “B”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 33,000 36,000 39, 000 42,000 45,000
(Kilometers) (53 000) (58 000) (62 000) (67 000) (72 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
months whichever comes first.
X X XXX
Rotate tires. X X
Change rear axle fluid. X
Change front axle fluid (4X4). X
Inspect brake linings. X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary.
X
SCHEDULE “B” 369
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 48,000 51,000 54,000 57,000 60,000
(Kilometers) (77 000) (82 000) (86 000) (91 000) (96 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
months whichever comes first.
X X XXX
Rotate tires. X X X
Change rear axle fluid. X
Change front axle fluid (4X4). X
Inspect brake linings. X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary.
X
Replace spark plugs. X
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** X
Inspect and replace ignition cables if necessary
(5.7L only).
X
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if re-
quired.
X
370 SCHEDULE “B”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 48,000 51,000 54,000 57,000 60,000
(Kilometers) (77 000) (82 000) (86 000) (91 000) (96 000)
Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid,
change filter (3.7L). This applies only if your ve-
hicle is used for police, taxi, fleet, or frequent
trailer towing.
X
Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid and
change main sump filter (4.7L/5.7L only). This ap-
plies only if your vehicle is used for police, taxi,
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
X
Inspect transfer case fluid (4X4). X
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months, or
102, 000 miles (163 000 km) whichever comes first.
SCHEDULE “B” 371
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 63,000 66,000 69,000 72,000 75,000
(Kilometers) (101 000) (106 000) (110 000) (115 000) (120 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
months whichever comes first.
XXXX
Rotate tires. X X
Change rear axle fluid. X
Change front axle fluid (4X4). X
Inspect brake linings. X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary.
X
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if re-
quired.
X
372 SCHEDULE “B”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 78,000 81,000 84,000 87,000 90,000
(Kilometers ) (125 000) (130 000) (134 000) (139 000) (144 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
months whichever comes first.
X X XXX
Rotate tires. X X X
Change rear axle fluid. X
Change front axle fluid (4X4). X
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). X
Inspect brake linings. X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary.
X
Replace spark plugs. X
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** X
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if re-
quired.
X
SCHEDULE “B” 373
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 93,000 96,000 99,000 100,000 102,000
(Kilometers) (149 000) (154 000) (158 000) (160 000) (163 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
months whichever comes first.
XXX X
Rotate tires. X X
Flush and replace engine coolant, if not replaced at
60 months.
X
Change rear axle fluid. X
Change front axle fluid (4X4). X
374 SCHEDULE “B”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 105,000 108,000 111,000 114,000 117,000 120,000
(Kilometers) (168 000) (173 000) (178 000) (182 000) (187 000) (192 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
months whichever comes first.
X X XXXX
Rotate tires. X X X
Change rear axle fluid. X X
Change front axle fluid (4X4). X X
Inspect brake linings. X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if
necessary.
XX
Replace spark plugs. X
Inspect and replace ignition cables if neces-
sary (5.7L only).
X
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** X
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if
required.
XX
Drain and refill transfer case fluid (4X4). X
SCHEDULE “B” 375
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 105,000 108,000 111,000 114,000 117,000 120,000
(Kilometers) (168 000) (173 000) (178 000) (182 000) (187 000) (192 000)
Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid,
change filter (3.7L). This applies only if your
vehicle is used for police, taxi, fleet, or fre-
quent trailer towing.
X
Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid
and change main sump filter and spin-on
cooler return filter if equipped. (4.7L/5.7L
only). This applies only if your vehicle is used
for police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer tow-
ing.
X
Flush and replace engine coolant at 120
months, if not replaced at 102,000 miles (163
000 km).
X
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-
ceipts.
376 SCHEDULE “B”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Schedule “A”
Miles 6,000 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000
(Kilometers) (10 000) (19 000) (29 000) (38 000) (48 000)
[Months] [6] [12] [18] [24] [30]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X
Rotate tires. X X X X X
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). X
Inspect brake linings. X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace as neces-
sary.
X
Replace spark plugs. X
SCHEDULE “A” 377
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 36,000 42,000 48,000 54000 60,000 66,000
(Kilometers) (58 000) (67 000) (77 000) (84 000) (96 000) (106 000)
[Months] [36] [42] [48] [54] [60] [66]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X
Rotate tires. X X X X X X
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). X
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60
months, if not replaced at 102,000 miles (163
000 km).
X
Inspect brake linings. X X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if
necessary.
X
Replace spark plugs. X
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary. * X
Inspect and replace ignition cables if neces-
sary (5.7L only).
X
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if
required.
X
378 SCHEDULE “A”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 72,000 78,000 84,000 90,000 96,000 100,000
(Kilometers) (115 000) (125 000) (134 000) (144 000) (154 000) (160 000)
[Months] [72] [78] [84] [90] [96]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X
Rotate tires. X X X X X X
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). X
Inspect brake linings. X X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if
necessary.
X
Replace spark plugs. X
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** X
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if
required.
X
SCHEDULE “A” 379
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 102,000 108,000 114,000 120,000
(Kilometers) (163 000) (173 000) (182 000) (192 000)
[Months] [102] [108] [114] [120]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X
Rotate tires. X X X X
Drain and refill tranfer case fluid (4X4). X
Flush and replace engine coolant, if not replaced at 60
months.
X
Flush and replace engine coolant at 120 months, if not
replaced at 102,000 miles (163 000 km).
X
Inspect brake linings. X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace as necessary. X
Replace spark plugs. X
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** X
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-
ceipts.
380 SCHEDULE “A”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
recommend that you take the following steps to mini-
mize the drain on your vehicle’s battery:
•
Disconnect the Ignition-Off Draw fuse (I.O.D.) fuse
located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). The
I.O.D. cavity includes a snap-in retainer that allows the
fuse to be disconnected, without removing it from the
fuse block.
•
The transfer case should be placed in the 4HI mode
and kept in this position to minimize the battery drain.
•
As an alternative to the above steps you may discon-
nect the negative cable from the battery.
SCHEDULE “A” 381
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle ..............................384
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ............384
▫ Prepare A List ........................384
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............384
䡵 If You Need Assistance ...................385
䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) .....387
䡵 Mopar威 Parts .........................389
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects ..................389
▫ In Canada ..........................389
䡵 Publication Order Forms ..................390
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
to make these arrangements when you call for an ap-
pointment.
384 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend
that you take your vehicle to you selling dealer. They
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained
technicians, special tools, and the latest information to
assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
manner.
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
want to know if you need assistance.
•
If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Dealership name
•
Vehicle identification number
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 385
9
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone —(800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
pected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be-
hind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service
386 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract Na-
tional Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufactur-
er’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See your manufacturer’s Warranty Information Booklet
for information on warranty coverage and transfer of
warranty.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 387
9
U.S. Vehicles Only
388 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
MOPAR姞 PARTS
Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-
tion (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Wash-
ington DC area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of
Transportation, Washington DC 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.
In Canada:
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 389
9
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
•
Service Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams
and charts.
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computer-
controlled vehicle systems and features. They show
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals.
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
390 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Call Toll Free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
•
www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 391
9
INDEX
10
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake) System ............167,236
Adding Fuel ........................262,286
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 316
Air Conditioner Maintenance ............198,319
Air Conditioning ........................197
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ............209
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone ................201
Air Conditioning Refrigerant .............319,320
Air Conditioning System ................197,319
Air Filter ..............................316
Air Pressure, Tires ....................249,257
Airbag .............................38,171
Airbag Light ............................51
Alarm ..............................24,167
Alarm, Panic ............................21
Alignment and Balance ...................256
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle .............6
Antenna, Satellite Radio ...................194
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...........326,327,357
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..............236
Anti-Lock Warning Light ..................167
Anti-Theft System .....................24,167
Appearance Care ........................337
Arming Theft System ......................25
Auto Unlock, Doors .......................16
Automatic Dimming Mirror ...............74,78
Automatic Door Locks .....................15
Automatic Headlights ....................122
Automatic Transaxle ......................221
Automatic Transmission .............218,221,332
Adding Fluid .........................333
Fluid and Filter Changes .................334
Fluid Level Check ......................332
Fluid Type ........................334,360
Gear Ranges ..........................221
Special Additives ......................334
Torque Converter ......................225
Axle Fluid .............................360
394 INDEX
Axle Lubrication ........................335
Ball Joints .............................321
Battery ...............................318
Charging ............................296
Emergency Starting .....................296
Gas Caution ..........................296
Keyless Transmitter Replacement ............24
Saving Feature (Protection) ...............121
Belts, Drive ............................315
Belts, Seat ..............................29
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...............321
B-Pillar Location ........................244
Brake Fluid ............................360
Brake System ........................236,330
Anti-Lock ...........................236
Disc Brakes ..........................330
Fluid Check ..........................331
Hoses ..............................332
Master Cylinder .......................331
Parking .............................234
Warning Light .....................167,169
Brakes ...............................236
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...............221
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........64
Bulb Replacement .......................349
Bulbs, Light ............................348
Calibration, Compass .....................140
Capacities, Fluid ........................357
Caps, Filler
Fuel .............................262,263
Oil (Engine) ..........................313
Power Steering ........................320
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ...............324
Car Washes ............................337
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............65,144,266
Cargo Management System .................156
INDEX 395
10
Cargo Organizer .......................156
Cargo Organizer ........................156
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) ...................268
Catalytic Converter ....................266,317
CD Player ..........................173,179
Cellular Phone ........................78,197
Center High Mounted Stop Light ............355
Certification Label .......................268
Changing A Flat Tire .....................288
Charging ..............................296
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................241
Child Restraint ........................54,55
Child Restraint Tether Anchors .............57,63
Child Restraint with Automatic Belts ...........35
Child Seat ..............................59
Circuit Breakers .........................341
Climate Control .........................197
Climate Control, Rear Zone ..............201,207
Clock ................................172
Compact Disc Maintenance .................196
Compact Spare Tire ......................252
Compass ..............................140
Compass Calibration .....................140
Compass Variance .......................141
Computer, Trip/Travel ....................136
Console, Floor ..........................153
Console, Overhead .......................135
Contract, Service ........................386
Converter, Catalytic ......................266
Coolant ...............................328
Coolant Pressure Cap .....................327
Cooling System .........................324
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............327
Coolant Capacity ......................357
Coolant Level .........................328
Disposal of Used Coolant ................325
Drain, Flush, and Refill ..................325
Inspection ...........................324
396 INDEX
Points to Remember ....................328
Radiator Cap .........................327
Selection of Coolant ...............326,357,359
Temperature Gauge .....................164
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ..............132
Cup Holder ............................154
Customer Assistance .....................385
Data Recorder, Event ......................52
Daytime Running Lights ...................123
Dealer Service ..........................310
Defroster, Rear Window ...................213
Defroster, Windshield ................66,200,205
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .................126
Diagnostic System, Onboard ................307
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .................165
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission .................332
Oil (Engine) ..........................311
Power Steering ........................320
Disarming, Theft System ...................25
Disc Brakes ............................330
Disposal
Used Coolant .........................325
Door Ajar Light .........................169
Door Locks .............................13
Door Opener, Garage .....................142
Drive Belts ............................315
Drive Shaft Universal Joints ................321
Electric Remote Mirrors ....................76
Electrical Power Outlets ...................151
Electronic Speed Control ...................132
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ...............239
Jacking .............................291
Overheating ..........................327
Tow Hooks ..........................298
INDEX 397
10
Towing .............................299
Emission Control System Maintenance .........362
Emission Related Components ..............329
Engine
Air Cleaner ..........................316
Block Heater .........................220
Break-In Recommendations ................64
Compartment ......................305,306
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................326,359
Cooling .............................324
Exhaust Gas Caution ..................65,266
Fails to Start ..........................219
Flooded, Starting ......................219
Fuel Requirements .....................357
Jump Starting .........................296
Oil ...........................311,357,359
Oil Filler Cap .........................313
Oil Selection ..........................357
Oil Synthetic .........................314
Overheating ..........................327
Starting .............................218
Temperature Gauge .....................164
Entry System, Illuminated ..................13
Equipment Identification Plate ..............284
Ethylene Glycol Antifreeze .................326
Event Data Recorder ......................52
Exhaust Gas Caution ................65,266,324
Exhaust System .......................65,323
Extender, Seat Belt ........................37
Exterior Lighting ........................123
Filters
Air Cleaner ..........................316
Engine Fuel ..........................316
Engine Oil ........................314,359
Engine Oil Disposal ....................314
Flashers
Hazard Warning .......................286
398 INDEX
Turn Signal .....................125,164,350
Flat Tire Stowage .....................289,295
Flooded Engine Starting ...................219
Floor Console ..........................153
Fluid, Brake .........................331,360
Fluid Capacities .........................357
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission .................332
Brake ...............................331
Cooling System .......................324
Engine Oil ...........................311
Power Steering ........................320
Transfer Case .........................335
Fog Lights ..........................124,356
Folding Rear Seat .....................106,109
Four Wheel Drive .......................226
Operation ...........................226
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ..................286
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...................239
Front Axle .............................336
Fuel .................................260
Adding .............................262
Filter ...............................316
Gauge ..............................164
Octane Rating ......................260,359
Requirements ......................260,357
Tank Capacity ........................357
Fueling ...............................262
Fuses .............................152,341
Garage Door Opener .....................142
GasCap ...........................263,307
Gas Gauge (Fuel Gauge) ...................164
Gasoline ..............................260
Gasoline, Reformulated ...................261
Gauges
Coolant Temperature ....................164
Fuel ................................164
INDEX 399
10
Odometer ...........................168
Speedometer .........................166
Tachometer ..........................167
Gear Ranges ...........................221
Glass Cleaning ..........................340
Grease ...............................336
Gross Axle Weight Rating ..................269
Gross Cargo Weight ......................268
GVWR ............................268,271
Hands-Free Phone ........................78
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................286
Headlights ............................349
Delay ..............................122
High Beam ...........................126
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ........126
Lights On Reminder ....................124
Passing .............................125
Replacing ............................349
Heated Mirrors ..........................77
Heated Seats ...........................105
Heater ...............................197
Heater, Engine Block .....................220
High Beam Indicator .....................165
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 126
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................275
Homelink Transmitter ....................142
Hood Release ..........................118
Hoses ................................329
Ignition ...............................12
Key .................................9
Lock ................................12
Illuminated Entry ........................13
Infant Restraint ........................54,55
Inflation Pressure Tires ....................257
Inside Rearview Mirror ....................74
400 INDEX
Instrument Cluster .......................164
Instrument Panel and Controls ..............162
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .............340
Integrated Power Module ..................347
Interior Appearance Care ..................339
Interior Fuses ..........................342
Interior Lighting ........................121
Interior Lights ..........................121
Intermittent Wipers ......................126
Introduction .............................4
Jack Operation .......................288,291
Jacking Instructions ......................292
Key, Replacement ........................10
Key, Sentry ..............................9
Key-In Reminder .........................9
Keyless Entry System ......................19
Keys ..................................9
Knee Bolster ............................38
Lane Change and Turn Signals .........125,164,350
Lap/Shoulder Belts .....................29,34
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . 57
Liftgate ................................26
Lights ..............................66,120
Airbag ............................51,171
Anti-Lock Warning .....................167
Automatic Headlights ...................122
Back-Up .............................350
Brake Warning ........................169
Bulb Replacement ...................348,349
Center Mounted Stop ...................355
Courtesy/Reading .....................136
Cruise ..............................171
Daytime Running ......................123
Door Ajar ...........................169
Fog ..........................124,165,356
INDEX 401
10
Hazard Warning Flasher .................286
Headlights ...........................123
High Beam ...........................126
High Beam/Low Beam Select .............126
Instrument Cluster ..................123,164
Interior ..........................121,136
License .............................354
Lights On Reminder ....................124
Low Fuel .........................164,165
Malfunction Indicator ...................170
Park ...............................123
Passing .............................125
Seat Belt Reminder .....................165
Service ..............................348
Turn Signal ........................125,350
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) .....164
Washer Fluid .........................170
Loading Vehicle .........................268
Tires ...............................244
Locks .................................13
Auto Unlock ..........................16
Automatic Door ........................15
Child Protection ........................17
Door ................................13
Ignition ..............................12
Keys .................................9
Power Door ...........................14
Steering Wheel .........................12
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) . 57
Lubricating Oil .........................336
Lubrication, Body .......................321
Lug Nuts .............................294
Luggage Carrier .........................155
Lumbar Support ........................103
Maintenance Free Battery ..................318
Maintenance Procedures ...................310
Maintenance Schedule ....................363
402 INDEX
Schedule ⬙A⬙ .........................377
Schedule ⬙B⬙ ..........................366
Malfunction Indicator Light ..............170,308
Manual, Service .........................390
Manual Transmission
Lubricant Selection .....................360
Map/Reading Lights .....................136
Memory Seat ...........................114
Mirrors ................................74
Automatic Dimming ...................74,78
Electric Powered .......................76
Heated ..............................77
Memory .............................114
Outside ..............................75
Rearview .............................74
Vanity ...............................77
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle .............6
Mopar Parts .........................309,389
Multi-Function Control Lever ...............124
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................64
Occupant Classification System ...............42
Occupant Restraints .......................28
Octane Rating, Gasoline ...................260
Oil, Engine .........................311,359
Capacity ............................357
Change Interval .......................312
Dipstick .............................311
Disposal ............................314
Filter ............................314,359
Filter Disposal ........................314
Identification Logo .....................313
Materials Added to .....................314
Recommendation ...................313,357
Synthetic ............................314
Viscosity ..........................313,357
Onboard Diagnostic System ..............307,308
Opener, Garage Door .....................142
INDEX 403
10
Outside Rearview Mirrors ..................75
Overdrive ..........................167,223
Overdrive OFF Switch ....................223
Overhead Console ....................135,136
Overhead Travel Information Center ..........136
Overheating, Engine ...................166,327
Owner’s Manual ........................390
Panic Alarm ............................21
Parking Brake ..........................234
Parking On Hill .........................234
Passing Light ...........................125
Pedals, Adjustable .......................130
Pets ..................................64
Pets, Transporting ........................64
Phone, Cellular ..........................78
Phone, Hands-Free .......................78
Placard, Tire and Loading Information .........245
Positive Crankcase Valve ..................330
Power
Brakes ..............................330
Distribution Center ..................341,345
Door Locks .........................13,14
Mirrors ..............................76
Outlet ..............................151
Steering ..........................238,320
Sunroof .............................149
Windows .............................27
Power Steering Fluid .....................360
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ..............37
Preparation for Jacking ....................291
Pretensioners
Seat Belts .............................35
Programmable Electronic Features .........144,148
Programming Transmitters ............22,144,148
Radial Ply Tires .........................252
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ..........327
404 INDEX
Radio Broadcast Signals ...................172
Radio Operation ...................173,179,197
Radio Reception ........................172
Radio, Satellite ..........................191
Radio (Sound Systems) .................173,179
Rear Axle .............................335
Rear Window Defroster ...................213
Rear Window Features ....................212
Rear Wiper/Washer ......................212
Rearview Mirrors ........................74
Reception, Radio ........................172
Reclining Front Seats .....................103
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts ...............................359
Recorder, Event Data ......................52
Recreational Towing ......................280
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) .......281
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) .....282
Reformulated Gasoline ....................261
Refrigerant ............................320
Release, Hood ..........................118
Reminder, Seat Belt .......................36
Remote Keyless Entry .....................19
Remote Sound System Controls ..............194
Replacement Keys ........................10
Replacement Parts .......................309
Replacement Tires .......................255
Reporting Safety Defects ...................389
Restraints, Child .......................54,59
Restraints, Occupant ......................28
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck ................239
Roof Type Carrier .......................155
Rotation, Tires ..........................259
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................66
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...............66
Safety Defects, Reporting ..................389
Safety Information, Tire ...................239
INDEX 405
10
Safety Tips .............................65
Satellite Radio ..........................191
Satellite Radio Antenna ...................194
Schedule, Maintenance ....................363
Seat Belt Maintenance ....................340
Seat Belt Reminder .......................36
Seat Belts ............................28,29
And Pregnant Women ...................37
Child Restraint .......................54,55
Extender .............................37
Front Seat ............................29
Inspection ............................66
Pretensioners ..........................35
Reminder ............................165
Seats .................................102
Adjustment ..........................102
Heated .............................105
Lumbar Support .......................103
Memory .............................114
Reclining ............................103
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) .............24,167
Selection of Coolant ......................359
Selection of Oil .........................313
Sentry Key ..............................9
Sentry Key Programming ...................11
Service and Maintenance .............310,362,363
Service Assistance ....................384,385
Service Contract .........................386
Service Manuals ........................390
Setting the Clock ........................172
Shifting
Automatic Transmission .................221
Transfer Case .........................226
Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer
Case Neutral (N) .....................281
Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer
Case Neutral (N) .....................282
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage ..............34
406 INDEX
Shoulder Belts ...........................29
Signals, Turn .....................125,164,350
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .................257
Snow Plow ............................279
Snow Tires ............................258
Spare Tire ..........................252,253
Spark Plugs ............................315
Speed Control ..........................132
Speedometer ...........................166
Starting ...............................218
Automatic Transmission .................218
Emergency (Jump Starting) ...............296
Engine Block Heater ....................220
Engine Fails to Start ....................219
Starting Procedures ......................218
Steering
Column Controls ......................124
Column Lock ..........................12
Power ...........................238,320
Wheel, Tilt ...........................129
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls .............................194
Storage, Vehicle .........................381
Stuck, Freeing ..........................239
Sun Roof ..............................149
Supplemental Tire Pressure Information ........257
Synthetic Engine Oil ......................314
Tachometer ............................167
Taillights ..............................350
Temperature Control, Automatic .............202
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant ..........164
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ...............57
Theft System Arming ......................25
Theft System Disarming ....................25
Thermostat ............................329
Tilt Steering Column .....................129
Tire and Loading Information Placard ....244,245,257
INDEX 407
10
Tire Identification Number (TIN) .............243
Tire Markings ..........................239
Tire Safety Information ....................239
Tires ...............................66,248
Air Pressure ..........................248
Alignment ...........................256
Chains ..............................257
Changing ............................288
Compact Spare ........................252
General Information ....................248
High Speed ..........................251
Inflation Pressures .....................249
Jacking .............................291
Load Capacity .....................244,245
Radial ..............................252
Replacement .........................255
Rotation .............................259
Safety ...........................239,248
Sizes ...............................241
Snow Tires ...........................258
Spare Tire ...........................289
Spinning ............................254
Tread Wear Indicators ...................254
Wheel Mounting .......................291
Wheel Nut Torque .....................294
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ..............274
Torque Converter Clutch ..................225
Tow Hooks, Emergency ...................298
Towing ...............................271
Disabled Vehicle .......................299
Guide ..............................275
Recreational ..........................280
Weight ..............................275
Traction ..............................284
Traction Control ......................128,168
Traction Control Switch ...................128
Trailer Towing ..........................271
Cooling System Tips ....................278
408 INDEX
Hitches .............................275
Minimum Requirements .................276
Trailer and Tongue Weight ................274
Wiring ..............................277
Trailer Towing Guide .....................275
Trailer Weight ..........................275
Transaxle .............................221
Automatic ...........................221
Operation ...........................221
Transfer Case ...........................335
Fluid ...............................360
Transmission ........................221,332
Automatic ........................221,332
Filter ...............................334
Fluid ............................334,360
Maintenance ..........................332
Transmitter Battery Service ..................24
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener ............142
Transmitter Programming ...................22
Tread Wear Indicators ....................254
Trip Computer ..........................136
Trip Odometer ..........................168
Trip Odometer Reset Button ................172
Turn Signals ......................125,164,350
Underhood Fuses ........................345
Universal Transmitter .....................142
Unlock, Auto ...........................16
Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses .................329
Vanity Mirrors ...........................77
Variance, Compass .......................141
Vehicle Identification Number ................5
Vehicle Loading ......................245,268
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ..............6
Vehicle Storage .........................381
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . 164
INDEX 409
10
Warnings and Cautions .....................5
Warranty Information .....................387
Washers, Windshield .....................127
Washing Vehicle .........................337
Weight Load Carrying ....................268
Wheel Alignment and Balance ...............256
Wheel and Wheel Trim ....................338
Wheel Changing ........................288
Wheel Mounting ........................291
Wheel Nut Torque .......................294
Wind Buffeting .........................150
Window Fogging ........................209
Windows ..............................27
Power ...............................27
Windshield Defroster ................66,200,205
Windshield Washers ................126,127,322
Fluid ............................126,322
Windshield Wiper Blades ..................322
Windshield Wipers .......................126
Wiper Blade Replacement ..................322
Wiper, Rear ............................212
Wipers, Intermittent ......................126
Wrecker Towing .........................299
410 INDEX
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
